GIFT OF 
 
 
, 
 
 y 
 
 (S.^.J. 
 
GREEK 
 
 PROSE COMPOSITION 
 
 BY 
 
 HENRY CARR PEARSON, A.B., HARVARD 
 
 HORACE MANN SCHOOL, TEACHERS COLLEGE, NEW YORK 
 
 NEW YORK - : - CINCINNATI . : - CHICAGO 
 
 AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY 
 
COPYRIGHT, 1897, BY 
 AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY 
 
 PEARSON, GREEK PROSE 
 
 GIFT 
 
PREFACE 
 
 THE aim of this book is (i) to combine a thorough and sys- 
 tematic study of the essentials of Greek syntax with abundant 
 practice in translating connected English into Attic Greek; and 
 (2) to afford constant practice in writing Greek at sight. 
 
 Part I contains, in graded lessons, the principal points of Greek 
 syntax, the unusual and non-essential being purposely omitted. 
 These lessons are designed for use at the beginning of the second 
 year's study of Greek, thereby serving as a partial review of the 
 first year's work and as an introduction to the composition work 
 in connection with the reading of Xenophon's Anabasis. 
 
 Part II contains short, simple English sentences, based on 
 Books I-IV of the Anabasis. These should be used daily in 
 connection with the reading of the text. 
 
 Part III contains connected English prose, based on Books 
 I-IV of the Anabasis. This is carefully graded, so that the stu- 
 dent who performs faithfully the work outlined here will be able to 
 pass the entrance examination of any of the American colleges. 
 
 The method of writing Greek at sight used in this book needs a 
 word of explanation. It is the outgrowth of the author's personal 
 experience in the classroom, and his belief that the best results 
 can be obtained only by systematic practice in connection with 
 the regular work. 
 
 At intervals, review lessons are introduced, containing a list of 
 the important words and an enumeration of the principal con- 
 
 3 
 
4 PREFACE 
 
 structions used in the preceding sentences. The instructor should 
 form original work for his class to translate at sight, based on these 
 words and constructions. While, strictly speaking, this is not sight 
 work, it enables the student to make definite preparation for this 
 kind of work, and gives him valuable practice in the offhand use 
 of words and principles of grammar. Furthermore, it enables the 
 teacher to vary the difficulty of the work to suit the ability of his 
 classc 
 
 The connected prose at the beginning of Part III has been made 
 very simple, so that Part II may be omitted by those instructors 
 who do not find time to do composition work along with the first 
 reading of Xenophon. The best results, however, will be obtained 
 from a completion of all the work here given. 
 
 The author is in full sympathy with the tendency to read other 
 prose works than Xenophon's Anabasis in college preparatory work, 
 and would have been glad to incorporate in this book exercises 
 based on other prose authors than Xenophon. The wide diversity 
 of opinion, however, as to just what authors should be read, and 
 the fact that Xenophon's Anabasis is made the basis of the com- 
 position requirement by nearly all the colleges, has made it prac- 
 tically impossible to prepare such exercises at present. 
 
 The author acknowledges his indebtedness to many of the text- 
 books in Greek Composition. 
 
 Mr. C. J Geer, of the English department of the Shady Side 
 Academy, Pittsburg, has given valuable assistance in the prepara- 
 tion of the English work of Parts II and III. 
 
 The author desires especially to thank William R. Crabbe, Ph.D., 
 the principal of Shady Side Academy, for his assistance and kind 
 encouragement. As a successful Greek instructor of long expe- 
 rience, his advice in the formation of this book and his criticism 
 in the correction of the manuscript have been invaluable. 
 
 HENRY CARR PEARSON 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS 
 
 PART I 
 
 LESSON PACK 
 
 I. The Article. The Nominative, Vocative, and Accusative 
 
 Cases 7 
 
 II The Genitive Case n 
 
 III. The Dative Case ....".... 14 
 
 IV. Pronouns : Demonstrative, Interrogative, Indefinite, Rela- 
 
 tive ...... . . . . 16 
 
 V. Pronouns : Personal, Direct and Indirect Reflexives, Pos- 
 sessive, avr6s . . ' . . 20 
 
 VI. Review with Sight Practice 24 
 
 VII. Tenses, Exhortations, Commands, and Prohibitions . . 26 
 VIII. Causal Clauses, Interrogative Subjunctive, Subjunctive 
 
 and Future Indicative with ov |&4j 29 
 
 IX. Wishes. Ought and Must 31 
 
 X. Purpose and Object Clauses 35 
 
 XI. Review with Sight Practice. The Second Aorist Tense 
 
 System 37 
 
 XII. Particular Conditions: Simple and Contrary to Fact . . 39 
 
 XIII. Particular Conditions: Vivid and Less Vivid Future . . 42 
 
 XIV. General Conditions 44 
 
 XV. Relative Conditions. M . 46 
 
 XVI. Review with Sight Practice 49 
 
 XVII. Before and Until 50 
 
 XVIII. Indirect Discourse. Simple Sentences 52 
 
 XIX. Indirect Discourse. Infinitive and Participle .... 55 
 
 XX. Indirect Discourse. Complex Sentences 57 
 
 XXI. Review with Sight Practice. Synopsis of ot8a .... 60 
 
 XXII. The Infinitive. Result Clauses 61 
 
 XXIII. The Participle 64 
 
 5 
 
6 TABLE OF CONTENTS 
 
 PART II 
 
 PAGE 
 
 NOTES ON CONNECTIVES 68 
 
 REMARKS ON TRANSLATION 70 
 
 EXERCISES BASED ON THE ANABASIS: 
 
 Book I 72 
 
 Book II 95 
 
 Book III .......' \ 109 
 
 Book IV i 121 
 
 PART III 
 
 EXERCISES BASED ON THE ANABASIS: 
 
 Book I . . '. 135 
 
 Book II. . . . ... ."'., . . . * ; . . 148 
 
 Book III 157 
 
 Book IV . . '.-.-. ; V . . . 165 
 
 ENGLISH- GREEK VOCABULARY 173 
 
 EXAMINATION PAPERS . 180 
 
 The grammatical references are to the Greek Grammars in most common 
 use; H. = Hadley- Allen. G. = Goodwin. B. = Babbitt. Go. = Goodell. 
 
GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION 
 
 LESSON I 
 
 THE ARTICLE THE NOMINATIVE, VOCATIVE, AND 
 ACCUSATIVE CASES 
 
 1. The definite article, 6, f|, TO, generally corresponds 
 to our article the. 
 
 2. An adjective or other word qualifying a noun is said 
 to be in the Attributive position when it follows the article 
 directly. It is in the Predicate position when it does not 
 directly follow its article. 
 
 ATTRIBUTIVE POSITION 
 6 d-yaOos dvrjp 
 
 6 dvrip 6 cryaOds 
 
 The brave man. 
 
 dvtjp 6 <rya66s 
 
 PREDICATE POSITION 
 
 6 dviip dvaGos \ ri L 
 
 ' r \ Ihe man is brave. 
 
 a-yaBos o avrjp } 
 
 [H. 666-670: 0.959-963,971-973: 6.451-453: 00.552.] 
 
 3. The following are some important facts to remember 
 about the use of the article : 
 
 i. The article is often used as a possessive pronoun when 
 such a meaning is obvious : f| 8c p/rJTqp d-TroTr[nri err! rip 
 dpx'iv, his mother sends him back to his province. [H. 658: 
 6.949: B. 447: Go. 551, </.] 
 
 7 
 
8 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION TART I 
 
 2. Names of persons usually omit the article. Yet they 
 often take it, to mark them as before mentioned or well 
 known : 6 Kvpos, Cyrus. [H. 663: G. 943: B. 446: Go. 551, #.] 
 
 3. Abstract nouns often take the article : TJ dpTTJ, vir- 
 tue ; T| SiKaioa'vvT],j?tstice. [H. 659: G. 944: B. 448: Go. 551, 4.] 
 
 4. The article is generally omitted with pacriXcvs when 
 referring to the king of Persia. [H. 660, c\ G. 957: B. 446, n.] 
 
 5. The demonstrative pronouns oSros, 68, and Ktvos 
 usually have the predicate position : oSros 6 <TTpaTuoTT|s, 
 this soldier. [H. 673: G. 974: B. 456 : Go. 553.] 
 
 6. irds, anas, o"ufiiras, and oXos generally have the 
 predicate position. So with JJLCO-OS, meaning the middle of: 
 ji(TT| T| xcopa, the middle of the country (while T] |iO"r| x^pd" 
 would mean the middle country}. [H. 672: G. 979: B. 454, 455.] 
 
 7. The article has a demonstrative force before jiV and 
 Slim expressing contrast : 6 JJLCV . . . 6 8, this man . . . that 
 man, the one . . . the other. [H. 654: G. 981 : B. 443, i : Go. 549, .] 
 
 8/ Adverbs and limiting phrases, such as prepositions 
 and their cases, may be used with the article and noun. 
 The noun may be understood and is, therefore, frequently 
 omitted: Mc'veov KCU ol aiiv avrc3, Menon and those with 
 him (his men); ol omaOev, those in the rear ; ol dvco o-Tpa- 
 TicoTai, the soldiers who are above ; ol vvv, the men of the 
 present generation. 
 
 ^ There is no indefinite article in Greek. The English 
 a or an must therefore usually be omitted in translation : 
 ir6Xis, a city. When the writer has in mind some particu- 
 lar person or thing, but does not name it, the indefinite 
 pronoun ris is used: dvrjp TIS ravra CTTOITJO-C, a (certain) 
 man did this. 
 
 ris is enclitic, and generally follows its noun. 
 
THE ACCUSATIVE 
 
 5. A predicate substantive with t|u and verbs signi- 
 fying to Become, be Named, be Elected, be Thought, and 
 Appear, is in the same case as the subject : alpciTcu <rrpa- 
 s, he is elected general. [H. 614 : G. 907 : B. 341, i : Go. 534, b.~\ 
 
 6. The Accusative joined with a verb, adjective, or 
 substantive may denote that In Respect to Which the 
 expression is used. This is called the Accusative of 
 Specification : TO, T aXXa KOpos Tip/ii<r |i, Cyrus hon- 
 ored me in other respects ; 6 irorajios rv TO exipos ir\- 
 Opiatos, the river was a pie thrum in width. [II. 718: G. 1058: 
 B. 337 : Go. 537.] 
 
 7. The Accusative may denote Extent of Time or 
 Space: cvra/GOa |iivav rpels Tp,pas, there they remained 
 three days ; |TJXawe irapa<raYYT|v, he marched a para- 
 sang. [H. 720: G. 1062: B. 338: Go. 538.] 
 
 8^ An Accusative is often used Adverbially : rcXos, 
 finally ; TO Xonrov, thenceforth ; TTJV Tayi(TTi\v, by the 
 
 quickest (*Q2jS). [H. 719: G. 1060: B. 336: Go. 540.] 
 
 9. Two Accusatives, usually one of the Person, the 
 other of the Thing, may follow verbs meaning to Ask, 
 Demand, Remind, Teach, Clothe, Unclothe, Conceal, De- 
 prive : Kvpov 8e Td irXota aiTrjo-eo, / will ask Cyrus for 
 the boats ; IpovXovTo a<t>aipio-9ai TOVS "EXX-qvas TT^V -yfiv, 
 they wz>/z^ to deprive the Greeks of their land. [H. 724: 
 
 G. 1069 : B. 340 : Go. 535.] 
 
 10., Verbs meaning to Do Anything To or Say Any- 
 thing Of a person or thing may take two Accusatives : 
 KCIKCOS a/uToiFS 1701^0-6, he did harm to them (here KaK&s 
 equals Kcucd, the second Accusative). [H. 725,0: G. 1073: B 
 340: Go. 534, a.] 
 
10 GREEK PROSE. COMPOSITION PART I 
 
 1L The Accusative is used after the adverbs of swear- 
 ing, vfj and |id, by. vr\ introduces an affirmative oath and 
 fid a negative one : [xd TOVS 6<rus, no, by the gods. - 
 
 The student will notice that vrj is opposite the meaning 
 to our English nay. This will help him to distinguish the 
 two words. [H. 723: G. 1066-67: B. 344: Go. 532.] 
 
 12. When the Vocative is used as the case of address, 
 is often written before it. [H. 709: G. 1044: B. 327: Go. 6i,<7.] 
 
 Article, H. 654-673: G. 941-981: B. 444-458: Go. 549-556- Norn, 
 and Voc., H. 706-709: G. 1043-1045: B. 325-327: Go. 503-504. Acc. t 
 H. 710-726: G. 1046-1082: B. 328-346: Go. 529-541. 
 
 13. TRANSLATE : 
 
 1. All the soldiers went back to their city. 
 
 2. You did this to a (certain) man. 
 
 3. " I will remind the whole army of this," said Cyrus, \ } 
 
 4. This man was made general by the great king, cf- ./ 
 
 5. Xenophon was general during the whole retreat (/card- 
 
 6. He remained in the middle of the city for three years. 
 
 7. "Yes, by Zeus," said he, "the man is brave." 
 
 8. Cyrus and his men are not braver than those in the 
 
 van. 
 
 9. The Greeks are asking Cyrus for a guide. 
 
 10. That man was brave in battle, but in other matters a 
 coward. 
 
THE GENITIVE II 
 
 LESSON II 
 THE GENITIVE CASE 
 
 14. In its relation to another noun, the Genitive may 
 denote : 
 
 1. Possession (Possessive Genitive): r6 TOO) irarpos 
 irXoiov, the father s boat. 
 
 2. The subject of an action or feeling (Subjective 
 Genitive): T| TOV (rTpaTTi'yov tiivoia, the good will of the 
 general (i.e. which the general feels). 
 
 3. Jhe object of an action or feeling (Objective Geni- 
 tive) : 6 T<OV pappdpcov cj>6pos TCOV ' EXXfjvcov, the barba- 
 rians' fear of the Greeks (i.e. the Greeks were the object 
 of their fear). 
 
 jj.. Material or contents, including that of which any- 
 thing consists (Genitive of Material): 8-uo xoivikcs dX<j>i- 
 Tcov, two quarts of meal. 
 
 5. Measure of space, time, or value (Genitive of Meas- 
 ure): iroSeov TT6VT6 TTOTdfios, a river of five feet (in depth). 
 
 J>._ The whole after nouns denoting a part (Partitive 
 Genitive): is TOVTCOV ^v "EXXt]v, one of these was a Greek. 
 [H. 729: G. 1085: B. 34^-352: Go. 506.] 
 
 4|u The Genitive may be used as the object of a verb. 
 This is often the case when the verb affects the object 
 only in part. Such verbs are those that mean to Share, 
 Enjoy, Hit, Miss, Aim, Begin, Lead, Rule, Take Hold 
 of, Touch, Perceive, Hear, Taste, Smell, Remember, For- 
 get : cip)(iv TOV e'p-you, to begin the work; T]KOD(T 6opv- 
 po\), he heard a noise ; ri]S paaiXcias |iTa8<o<r(o, / will 
 
12 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART I 
 
 sJiare the kingdom ; ity ^ TO rot) oTpaT0|iaTos, he led the 
 army. 
 
 j. Verbs of hearing usually have the Thing Heard in 
 the Accusative and the Person From Whom in the Geni- 
 tive : iJKOvo- Tur(ra<|>pvovs T&V <rr6Xov, he heard of the 
 expedition from TissapJiernes. 
 
 ,^2-^The Genitive very often expresses the Part Taken 
 Hold of : \apov rfjs <ovqs TOV 'Opdvrav, they took hold of 
 Orontas by the girdle. 
 
 3. The verb <ryeo is an exception to the rule that verbs 
 of leading and ruling take the Genitive. [H. 737-742: G. 1097, 
 
 1099, 1 102: B. 356: Go. 510, 511.] 
 
 16. The Genitive is also used with verbs denoting Sepa- 
 ration, Comparison, Source. Such verbs are those that 
 mean to Deprive, Remove, Spare, Release, Abandon, 
 Differ, Surpass, Be Superior or Inferior to, Be Full of, 
 Want : CWTKC&V 8i<rxiXi<ov SCTJO-OJICU, / shall need two thou- 
 sand skins ; cnr)(i Ten) iroTap.O'u <rra8|idv, he is a day's 
 journey distant from the river. 
 
 NOTE. What other construction may be used after a 
 verb of depriving? [H. 743, 748, 749, 750: G. 1112, 1117, 1120, 
 1130: B. 362, 364, 365: Go. 509.] 
 
 17. The Genitive expresses the Cause, Crime, or Value. 
 
 1. The Cause, after verbs of Praise, Pity, Anger, and 
 Revenge : TTJS \\)0pias vfxds cvSaijiovi^o, / congratulate 
 you on your freedom. [H. 744: G. 1126: B. 366: Go. 509, c~\ 
 
 2. The Crime, after verbs of Accusing, Acquitting, Con- 
 demning, and Convicting: SUOKOD crc dorpias, I prosecute 
 you for impiety. [H. 745 : G. 1121 : B. 367 : Go. 514.] 
 
 3. The Value, after verbs of Buying, Selling, Valuing, 
 etc. : 8paxP1$ irpiaaBai, to buy for a drachme. [H. 746: G. 
 "S3: B. 353: 60.513.] 
 
THE GENITIVE 13 
 
 18. Many verbs compounded with a preposition take 
 the Genitive when the preposition, used by itself in the 
 same sense, would have that case. 
 
 Especially many compounds of Kara which have the 
 sense of feeling or acting against, take the Genitive of the 
 Person : Karo/ycXo) \IJJLCOV, / laugh at you. [H. 751-752: G. 
 1132: B. 370.] 
 
 19. Many adjectives are followed by the Genitive. Such 
 adjectives are generally kindred in meaning to verbs which 
 take the Genitive. [H. 753: G. 1139-1140: B. 362, 2, 367: Go. 516.] 
 
 20. The Genitive expresses the Time Within Which an 
 action occurs : pacriXevs 8cKa -n|Xpcov fiax^trai, the king 
 will fight within ten days. [H. 759: G. 1136: B. 359: Go. 515.] 
 
 21. Adjectives and adverbs of the comparative degree 
 are followed by the Genitive when ij, than, is omitted. 
 
 [H. 755: G. 1153: B. 3 6 3 : Go. 517.] 
 
 Gen., H. 727-761: G. 1083-1156: B. 347-372: Go. 505-518. 
 
 22. TRANSLATE : 
 
 1. For what (rt) does he need the whole army ? 
 
 2. They heard these things from the general's daughter. 
 
 3. For many days Clearchus led the army. 
 
 4. They arrived at a river six feet deep. 
 
 5. He began his speech as follows : " I will not take ven- 
 
 geance on them for their evil deeds." 
 
 6. Nobody missed his man. 
 
 7. In the night they had fear of the Greeks. 
 
 8. Those men are more cowardly than these with us. 
 
 9. He bought a chariot for twenty darics. 
 
 10. They overcame the enemy when they were 1 three 
 stadia distant from the city. 
 
 1 Use participle. 
 
14 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART I 
 
 LESSON III 
 
 THE DATIVE CASE 
 
 23. The Dative is the case of the Indirect Object of a 
 transitive verb. This object is generally introduced in 
 English by to : '8eoK TO> dvSpl tmrov, he gave a horse to 
 the man, or he gave the man a horse. [H. 763-764: G. 1158: 
 B- 375 : Go - 5 20 -] 
 
 24. The Dative is used with many intransitive verbs 
 (omit to in translation) meaning to Benefit, Serve, Obey, 
 Please, Profit, Trust, Aid, Befit, and their contraries ; also 
 with verbs denoting disposition toward any one, as Anger, 
 Envy, Favor, Threats. 
 
 m<TT\)OV o/uT(3 at TToXcis, the cities trusted him. 
 TCO (TTpaTT^Y^ TTi6ero, he obeyed his general. 
 T(5 pa<ri\L po-qOrjo-a), / will aid the king. 
 i. <0<|>Xco, to aid, takes the Accusative instead of the 
 Dative. [H. 764, 2: G. 1160: B. 376: Go. 520, .] 
 
 25. The Dative indicates the person or thing to whose 
 Advantage or Disadvantage the action of the verb takes 
 place. This Dative is sometimes translated like the Geni- 
 tive of Possession. 
 
 rots Vavi<rKois V)(av otvov, they poured in wine for the 
 young men. 
 
 rd oirXa rots crrpaTKorais erri d}ia|cov ity* 1 " * ^ le ar/ w> s f 
 the soldiers were carried on wagons (literally, the arms 
 ivere carried for the soldiers, etc.). [H. 767: G. 1165: B. 378: 
 
 Go. 523.] 
 
 26. The Dative with cijii, 'yi'Y vo l JL( u and similar verbs 
 may denote the Possessor : TI carat t|p.tv, what shall we 
 
THE DATIVE 15 
 
 have? The same idea could be expressed (though less 
 commonly) by using C'XOD. [H. 768: G. 1173: B. 379: Go. 524,0.] 
 
 27. Just as was the case with the Genitive, the Dative 
 follows many adjectives and adverbs and some verbal sub- 
 stantives kindred in meaning to the verbs which take the 
 Dative of the indirect object or of advantage or disad- 
 vantage. [H. 765: G. 1174: Go. 522.] 
 
 28. The Dative is used with words that imply Likeness 
 or Unlikeness and Association or Opposition, Some com- 
 mon verbs coming under this rule are -iroXc^co, \La\o\Lai, 
 and iro[iai. [H. 772-773: G. 1175: B. 392: Go. 525.] 
 
 29. Many verbs compounded with V, o-uv, 4m, and 
 some with irpos, irapd, ircpi, vrro take the Dative : T|p.lv 
 m9TJ<rovrai, they will attack us. [H. 775: G. 1179: B. 394.] 
 
 30. The Dative is used to denote Cause, Manner, and 
 Means or Instrument; also the Degree of Difference after 
 comparatives : irporcpa Ktipou TTCVTC T||jLpais <X<|>IKTO, she 
 
 anived five days before Cyrus (literally, before Cyrus by five 
 days). [H. 776, 781: G. 1181, 1184: B. 387-391 : Go. 526.] 
 
 31. The Dative denotes the Time When an action takes 
 place : TTJ v<TTpoia, on the next day. [H. 782: G. 1192: 6.385: 
 
 Go. 527, c.-] 
 
 i. xpaoficu, to use, takes the Dative case (like utor, 
 which takes the Ablative). 
 
 Caution. Do not express Motion To or Towards by 
 the Dative. Use a preposition and the Accusative. 
 
 Dative, H. 762-783: G. 1157-1198: B. 373-395: Go. .49-527. 
 
 ativ 
 
 i 
 
l6 GREEK PROSE COM POSH ION PART I 
 
 32. TRANSLATE : 
 
 1. I do not envy the king's men. 
 
 2. For seven days the soldiers followed him. 
 
 3. I persuaded him to obey them. 
 
 4. There Cyrus had a palace. 
 
 5. This soldier always helped the king. 
 
 6. He used the arrows which he had. 
 
 7. On that day fear fell upon the Greeks. 
 
 8. The mercenaries were very angry with Clearchus. 
 
 9. A brave man will not fight with a friend. 
 
 10. On the fourth day Tissaphernes attacked the Greeks 
 
 LESSON IV 
 
 PRONOUNS: DEMONSTRATIVE, INTERROGATIVE, INDEFINITE, 
 
 RELATIVE 
 
 33. I. The ordinary demonstrative pronoun is oSros, 
 this. Of the other demonstratives, 886, this (here), is used 
 of something near or present; Kivos, that (yonder), of 
 something remote. 
 
 2. oSros is used in referring back to something already 
 mentioned ; 886 in referring forward to something about 
 to be mentioned. 
 
 3. There occur in Attic prose several compounds of 
 OVTOS and 88c, as TOLOVTOS and rouScrSc, such, and roaovTos 
 and TouocrSc, so much, so many. The student will notice 
 that all pronouns compounded with TOL- or 01- denote 
 Quality, and with TOO"- or oo*-, Quantity. 
 
 4. Thus we generally find at the end of a speech such 
 expressions as '\ ravra (or Toia/Ora) ; while before 
 
PRONOUNS I^ 
 
 the speech we find \| rdSc (or ToidSt). [H. 271, 272, 273: 
 
 G. 409, 429: B. 480-482: Go. 205-212.] 
 
 Caution. Remember what was said in Lesson I, that 
 demonstrative pronouns, when used with a noun, usually 
 take the predicate position. 
 
 34. i. The principal interrogative pronoun is TVS, TIS, 
 TI, who ? which ? what ? This always has the acute 
 accent on the first syllable. It is declined as follows : 
 
 SINGULAR PLURAL 
 
 M andF. N. M and F. N. 
 
 Nom. rCs T( rtvcs rva 
 
 Gen. rCvos, TOV r(vo>v 
 
 Dat. rtvi, rip ifcn, 
 
 Ace. rCva rl rtvas rCva 
 
 DUAL 
 
 N.AV. T(VI 
 
 G. and D TVOIV 
 
 2. The indefinite pronoun is rls, rls, rl, some, any. 
 This pronoun is enclitic. It is declined just like the 
 interrogative, except that the accent in declension is always 
 on the ultima. 
 
 3. The interrogative of Quality is irotos, iroid, irotov, of 
 what sort? and of Quantity iroaos, Tr6<rr|, iroaov, how much ? 
 [H. 277-278: G. 415-416: B. 489-491, 151 : Go. 217-222.] 
 
 35. i. The relative pronouns are os, TJ, 6, who, which, 
 that, what, and 6<rris, TJTIS, o TI, whoever, whichever, what- 
 ever. The latter is called the indefinite relative. 
 
 2. OO-TLS is a compound of os and rls, and both parts 
 are declined together. The accent of 6s is not affected 
 by the presence of ris. 
 
 GK. PROSE COMP. 2 
 
1 8 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART I 
 
 Masc. Fern. Ncut 
 
 Nona. OO-TIS -qris o n 
 
 Gen. OVTIVOS, OTOV iJo-Tivos OVTIVOS, OTOV 
 
 Dat. WTLVL, OTCU TJTLVL COTLVL, OTW 
 
 Ace. ovriva rjvTiva o TI 
 
 N.A.V. arrive <SriV arrive 
 
 G. and D. olvnvoiv otvTivoiv otvTivoiv 
 
 Nom. ofrrivcs arrives 6/riva 
 
 Gen. WVTLVCOV, OTWV WVTLVCOV WVTLVWV, OTWV 
 
 Dat. olo"Tion, OTOIS alo-Tio'i olo-Tio-i, OTOIS 
 
 Ace. ovo-Tivas ao-Ttvas dtTiva 
 
 3. The following relatives of Quality occur : otos and 
 OTTO LOS, of which kind, (such) as; and of Quantity, oaos and 
 6ir6(ros, how much, how many, (as much or as many) as. 
 
 [H. 275, 280, 282 : G. 421, 425, 429: B. 151 : Go. 215, 222.] 
 
 36. The relative agrees with its antecedent in gender, 
 number, and person, but its case is determined by the 
 construction of the clause in which it stands : 6 'LTTTTOS, 
 ov t8, KaXos ^v, the horse which he saw was beautiful. 
 
 [H. 627: G. 1019: B. 462: Go. 613, a.~] 
 
 37. The antecedent of the relative may be omitted, 
 when it is implied in the context. Sometimes it is incor- 
 porated into the relative clause. 
 
 OVK dircKpilTrTCTO i^v t)( < y V( ^K LT l v > ^ e did not conceal the 
 
 opinion which he had (i.e. TTJV \V&\LI\V r\v ctx*). 
 TTOIOWI d poxiXovTai, they do what they wish (i.e. To/Ora a 
 
 [H. 995-996: G. 1037, 1026: B. 461 : Go. 613, d, 614.] 
 
 38. When a relative would naturally be in the Accusa- 
 tive as the object of the action of a verb, it is generally 
 assimilated to the case of its antecedent, if this is a Geni- 
 tive or a Dative : &|ioi T^S \v8pias T|S KKTT]cr0 (instead 
 
PRONOUNS 19 
 
 -of r\v KKTT](r8), worthy of the freedom ivhich you have 
 acquired. [H. 994: G. 1031 : B. 465 : Go. 613, b.~] 
 
 ^9^ The indefinite relative, instead of the interrogative, 
 is often used to introduce an indirect question : \-yv o TL 
 iroiT|<r, he told what he did. [H. ion : G. 1013: B. 490: Go. 621.] 
 
 40. The student should remember that a relative clause 
 is very often expressed in Greek by the participle, with or 
 without the article. 
 
 TT]V iroXiv owav V T(3 iT8icp, the city which was in the 
 
 plain (literally, being in the plain). 
 6 To/Orci iroiTJaas, he who has done this. 
 rd yiyv6\Ltva, tJiose things which are going on. 
 TO. y 4 Y V1 lH L * va > those things which have happened. 
 
 Caution. In rendering expressions like these things 
 which have happened, do not use To/Ora for these things. 
 The article alone with the participle is the Greek usage. 
 
 41. TRANSLATE : 
 
 1. Such words Tissaphernes spoke, but Xenophon replied 
 
 as follows. 
 
 2. They came to a certain river that was twenty feet wide. 
 
 3. The man who has planned these things is clever. 
 
 4. " Who is this guide ? " said Cyrus. 
 
 5. That man is braver than the one who is present. 
 
 6. We who are so brave (TOIOVTOI) and so many are 
 
 Greeks. 
 
 7. He told us what Cyrus said. 
 
 8. And with her he sent the soldiers whom Menon had. 
 . And they ask him how large the country is. 
 
 10. What sort of a boy has he ? 
 
2O GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART I 
 
 LESSON V 
 
 PRONOUNS: PERSONAL, DIRECT AND INDIRECT REFLEXIVES, 
 
 POSSESSIVE, 
 
 42. The Nominative forms of the personal pronouns are 
 omitted unless emphatic. If emphatic, they are expressed. 
 
 [H.6 77 : 0.985: 6.467: Go. 557.] 
 
 43. i. A reflexive pronoun usually refers to the sub- 
 ject of the sentence. When it refers to the subject of the 
 clause in which it stands, it is called a direct reflexive. 
 
 2. In a dependent clause, the reflexive pronoun often 
 refers to the subject, not of the dependent, but of the 
 principal verb. It is then called an indirect reflexive, and 
 must be distinguished from the direct reflexive. 
 
 yvcoOi <rcu)T6v, know thyself. 
 
 IpoiiXcTO dirav T& o-TpaTcvjia irpos iavrbv c'xav TTJV yv<o|i'qv, 
 
 he wished the whole army to be devoted to himself. (av- 
 TOV, an indirect reflexive, because it refers to the subject 
 of IpotiXcTo, the principal verb.) [H. 683, a-. G. 993: B. 470, 
 
 471 : Go. 200.] 
 
 44. The personal pronouns of the first and second per- 
 sons are declined thus : 
 
 First Person Second Person 
 
 f Nom. fy orv 
 
 SING. Gen ' **> V* 
 
 1 Dat. cju>(, |io( <ro ( 
 
 ACC. U., IX CT 
 
 DUAL j N.A.V. * 
 I G. and D. v<f 
 
 v<fv <r<|)pv 
 
PRONOUNS 21 
 
 First Person Second Person 
 
 Nom. 
 
 PLUR. , Gen * 
 Dat. 
 
 Acc. 
 
 45. There is no pronoun of the third person in regular 
 use. In all cases but the Nominative avros serves as the 
 pronoun of the third person, him, her, it, them. When the 
 pronoun of the third person is emphatic in the Nomina- 
 tive case, some demonstrative is used, cumfe is declined 
 like cryaSos, except that it has axmJ for a/urdv in the Nomi- 
 native and Accusative neut. sing. 
 
 46. Airr6s is used in three ways : 
 
 1. As a pronoun of the third person. 
 
 2. As an intensive, meaning self, very (like ipse in 
 Latin) : avr6s 6 avrjp, the man himself. 
 
 3. Preceded by the article, meaning the same (like idem 
 in Latin) : 6 O/UTOS dv^p, the same man (rd avrd, the same 
 things, is generally written Taxrrd; not to be confused 
 with-Tcn)Ta. [H. 678-680: 0.989: 6.475: Go. 199.] 
 
 47. The following is the declension of the reflexive 
 pronouns : 
 
 First Person Second Person Third Person 
 
 Gen. fiavTov, -TJS o-cavrov, -r\s cavrov, -fjs, -ov, or avrov, etc. 
 
 Dat. ficu>Tw, --g (Tcavrw, --Q cavTcp, -"5, -a>, or avrw, etc. 
 
 Acc. Ijiavrov, -^jv o-cavTov, -i\v i'avrov, -4\v, -6, or avrov, etc. 
 
 Gen. TJfiwv avrcov v|Jicav avrwv cavrwv or <r<|>uv avrcov 
 
 Dat. tjfiiv avrots, -ats v^tv avrois, -ais eavrots, -as, or cr4>uriv avrots, -ats 
 
 Acc. iJixas avrovs, -as v|ids avrovs, -as cavrovs, -as, -a, or o-<)>ds avrovs, -as 
 
22 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART I 
 
 Norn. 
 
 Gen. ov <r<j>wv 
 
 Dat. ol o-<J>cri 
 
 Ace. 6 <r<t>ds 
 
 and o-cauTofl are used both as direct and indi- 
 rect reflexives. 
 
 oS, ot, <i is an indirect reflexive of the third person, but 
 the forms o5 and c are not used in Attic Greek. 
 
 cauTov, a direct reflexive, is used as an indirect reflexive 
 in place of o5 and c. 
 
 48. The following forms of the personal pronouns are 
 enclitic : |ioQ, (Jioi, |i ; <roi), aoi, a ; oS, ot, . 
 
 If the pronoun is emphatic, and in general after prepo- 
 sitions, the enclitic forms of the pronoun retain their 
 accent, and in the first person the longer forms |ioi), qxoi, 
 !|i are then used. [H. 263: G. 986: B. 70: Go. 19.] 
 
 49. i. The possessive pronouns are formed from the 
 personal pronouns. They are ifios, my, mine ; T|fJLTpos, 
 our; aos, your (sing.), vjiercpos, your (plur.). They are 
 inflected like <rya06s, fiaKpds. 
 
 2. The possessive pronouns take the article when a 
 particular object is referred to : ji6s (JnXos, a friend of 
 mine ; 6 [ios <j>iXos, my friend (the particular one). 
 
 [H. 675 : G. 946, I : B. 476-478 : Go. 204.] 
 
 50. I. There is. no possessive of the third person in 
 Attic prose. The Genitive of O/UTOS, in the predicate 
 position, is used to express his, her, its, their. 
 
 2. In a like manner the Genitives of the personal pro- 
 noun (especially in the singular) are sometimes used in 
 the predicate position, instead of the possessives cjids, T|p.- 
 
 TpOS, O*6S, V|ITpOS. 
 
PRONOUNS 
 
 3. Genitives of the reflexive pronouns, when they ex- 
 press possession, take the attribute position. 
 
 my father. 
 
 6 |ios TrctTTJp 
 
 6 ira/nip 6 |Ji6s 
 
 iraTTjp 6 fios 
 
 6 iraTTJp [JLOD 
 
 ctSc TOV irarcpa O/UTCOV, he saw their father. 
 
 Tfl cavTOv X l pi> with Ins own hand. 
 
 [H. 690, 689, 692, 3 : G. 998, 2, 1002, 1003: B. 466-479 : Go. 194-204, 557-559.] 
 
 51. TABLE OF PERSONAL, REFLEXIVE, AND POSSESSIVE 
 PRONOUNS 
 
 
 Personal 
 
 Direct 
 
 Reflexives 
 
 Indirect 
 Reflexives 
 
 Possessives 
 
 First 
 Person 
 
 4-yw 
 
 Ijiavrov 
 
 fJLCU)TOV 
 
 nos(sing.),TJ|i'Tpos 
 (plur.), or Gen. of 
 personal in predi- 
 cate position 
 
 Second 
 Person 
 
 <rv 
 
 creavTOv 
 
 (Tcavrov 
 
 <r6s (sing.), vplrcpos 
 (plur.), or Gen. of 
 personal in predi- 
 cate position 
 
 Third 
 Person 
 
 avr6s in all 
 cases but 
 Nom. 
 
 cavrov 
 or 
 avrov 
 
 (ov'), ol, (i'), etc. 
 Forms in ( ) not 
 Attic. . Use eavrov 
 
 Use Gen. of avros 
 in the predicate 
 position 
 
 NOTE. Remember that the article is often used where 
 in English we use an unemphatic possessive pronoun 
 (3, i). 
 
24 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART I 
 
 52. TRANSLATE : 
 
 1 . That young man killed himself. 
 
 2. You are a Greek, but I am a Persian. 
 
 3. When he saw them, he laughed. 
 
 4. They did not wish the enemy to see them. 
 
 5. My brother sent off his own father. 
 
 6. They fought with one another on that day. 
 
 7. This soldier was a friend of mine. 
 
 8. During the same day the Greeks themselves set out. 
 
 9. We have been wronged by their king. 
 
 10. Greeks, your general has done the same thing. 
 
 LESSON VI 
 
 REVIEW 
 
 53. Review carefully all of the principles given in 
 1-51. 
 
 54. Learn thoroughly the meaning of the following 
 list of words, memorizing the principal parts of all the 
 verbs : 
 
 1. S&0, Seoficu 1 5. alrco) 
 
 2. aKovco 6. IpcoTcuo 
 
 3. |jLL|Jivf<rK() 2 7. d<j>aipa> 
 
 4. |XVo> 8. alpeto 3 
 
 1 W, meaning to want, need, request, takes the Genitive. 
 
 2 Notice the active and middle meaning. The Perfect middle is used with 
 a present meaning, like memini in Latin. 
 
 8 Act. seize, mid. choose. 
 
REVIEW 
 
 9. KpVTTTCi) 
 
 10. TTOl<0 ( KdKCOS Or V) 
 
 11. d(|>lKV0)iai 
 
 12. apxco 
 
 13. Tl|iO)p(0 
 
 14. d>veo|icu 
 
 1 5 . 
 
 1 6. Kpareco 
 17. 
 
 1 8. 
 
 19. d|JLapTdva) 
 
 20. dirpxo|JLat 
 
 21. TOS 
 
 22. Kardpacris 
 
 23. 
 24. 
 
 25. 6m<T0V 
 
 26. pdGos 
 
 27. 9vy&Tiip 
 
 28. irovs, iro86s 
 
 29. \6-yos 
 
 30. iri6o) (act. and mid. 1 ) 
 31. 
 
 32. 
 
 57. 
 
 33- 
 
 34. (b(j>X'a>, 
 35. 
 
 36. 
 37. 
 38. 
 
 39. 
 
 40. pcwriXcia 
 
 41. 
 42. 
 
 43- 
 
 44. |iicT0ocj)6pos 
 
 45. \ipos 
 
 46. 8iv6s 
 
 47. irais, iraiSds 
 
 48. diroKpivo)iai 
 49. 
 
 50. 
 51. 
 
 52. dlTOKTlVa) 
 
 53. opdo) 
 
 54. iropvo> (mid. 2 ) 
 
 55. vcavias 
 
 56. dXX-qXcov 
 
 55. From the above list of words, let the instructor 
 form sentences embodying the principles of the first five 
 lessons. The student should write these sentences at 
 sight in the class-room. 
 
 1 Act. persuade (Accusative), mid. obey (Dative). 
 
 2 Act. make go , mid. proceed. 
 
26 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART I 
 
 LESSON VII 
 
 TENSES EXHORTATIONS, COMMANDS, AND PROHIBITIONS 
 
 56. Keep in mind the following points in regard to the 
 use of the tenses in the Indicative mood : 
 
 1. The Aorist is of very frequent occurrence. It is 
 more often used for the English Perfect than the Perfect 
 itself, and frequently takes the place of the Pluperfect. 
 As distinguished from the Imperfect it expresses a Simple 
 Past Occurrence : eironjo-a, / did ; while the Imperfect 
 eiroiovv denotes Repeated or Continued Past Action, / was 
 doing or used to do. The Aorist is also often used to 
 express the English Imperfect. 
 
 Let the student acquire the habit of using the Aorist 
 for the Perfect unless emphasis is put on the fact that 
 the action is completed in present time. 
 
 2. In general avoid the use of the Pluperfect. 
 
 3. Remember that there are several Perfects with the 
 force of Presents, and Pluperfects with the force of Imper- 
 fects : fJLp,vii[iai, / remember. 
 
 4. The following is the division of tenses into Primary 
 or Principal, and Secondary or Historical : 
 
 PRIMARY (PRINCIPAL) SECONDARY (HISTORICAL) 
 
 Present Imperfect 
 
 Future Aorist 
 
 Perfect Pluperfect 
 Future Perfect 
 
 [H. 824-850: G. 1249-1270: B. 519-538: Go. 453-47 2 46.] 
 
TENSES EX HORTATIONS 2J 
 
 57. i. The distinctions of time which mark the tenses 
 of the Indicative are not maintained in the Subjunctive and 
 Imperative, and generally not in the Optative and Infinitive. 
 
 2. In using all moods but the Indicative, the Time should 
 be lost sight of and the student should consider only the 
 Kind of Action of the verb, i.e. whether the verb expresses 
 a continuance of the action or a simple occurrence or the 
 completion. The Present tense denotes an action as con- 
 tinued or repeated ; the Aorist as simply brought to pass, 
 the Perfect as completed. 
 
 dv TOVTO iroi/fj (Present), if he shall do this (habitually), or 
 
 if he shall be doing this. 
 dv Tofiro iroiTJ<rr| (Aorist) (simply), if he shall do this. 
 
 [H. 851 : G. 1271-1276: B. 539: Go. 475.] 
 
 58. The Present and the Aorist are the tenses com- 
 monly used in the Subjunctive, Optative, Imperative, 
 Infinitive, and Participle. 
 
 The Perfect is rare in the Subjunctive, and not common 
 in the other moods. 
 
 The Future Optative is used only in indirect discourse, 
 and the Future Infinitive is generally used in that con- 
 struction. 
 
 59. The first person of the Subjunctive (generally 
 plural) is used to express an Exhortation. The negative 
 is JJLTJ : 'X6o>[iV, let us go ; \LT\ iro\|iioi 'y vcofi6a, let us 
 
 not become enemies. [H. 866, i : G. 1344: B. 585 : Go. 472.] 
 
 60. An exhortation in the third person is expressed by 
 the third person of the Imperative mood : IXOerco eiri TTJV 
 iroXiv, let him come to the city ; x al povTcov, let him rejoice. 
 [G. 1342: B. 582: Go. 484.] 
 
28 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART I 
 
 61. The second person of the Imperative is used to 
 express a Command or Prohibition : TOVTO iroUi, do this 
 (command); |iT] TOVTO iroii, do not do this (prohibition). 
 
 62. In negative commands (i.e. prohibitions) \LT\ is used 
 with the Present Imperative if the act is continued, but 
 with the second person of the Aorist Subjunctive if the 
 simple occurrence of the act is to be expressed. 
 
 (JLTJ TTOii TOVTO, do not do this (habitually), or do not go on 
 
 doing this. 
 \LT\ iroiTjo"(|S TOVTO, do not do this, referring to a single 
 
 action. [H. 874, a-. G. 1346: B. 584: Go. 485.] 
 
 SUMMARY 
 
 Let us come, \6co|iV 
 
 Come, \8T 
 
 Let them come, 
 
 Do not come (habitually), \LT\ 
 
 Do not come (single act), \M\ \8T]T 
 
 63. TRANSLATE : 
 
 1 . Let us see all the horses that you have. 
 
 2. Fellow soldiers, do not be discouraged. 
 
 3. Let the king be honored by his sailors. 
 
 4. Do not throw your arrows against the enemy. 
 
 5. Try to be braver than those who are in his house. 
 
 6. Let us not proceed home (oWSe), but let us use the 
 
 provisions that we have. 
 
 7. " Hear my words," said Cyrus. 
 
 8. Do not shut the door. 
 
 9. Let us not do harm to our own country. 
 IO. Do not wonder at this. 
 
CAUSAL CLAUSES OV |ITJ 29 
 
 LESSON VIII 
 
 CAUSAL CLAUSES INTERROGATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE SUBJUNC- 
 TIVE AND FUTURE INDICATIVE WITH OV [LT\ 
 
 64. Causal clauses state the cause of an action and are 
 introduced by OTI, <bs, iri, eiraSTJ, OT and oirore, because 
 or since. They take the Indicative after both primary and 
 secondary sentences : gXnrc S\)Wcn,s TO, dKpa, on TJKOUC, 
 Syennesis left the heights, because he heard ; Tats vaxxrt 
 iroXiopKi MfXtyrov, 8r Tu7aa<|>pvi <}>XT| &TTIV, //<? besieges 
 Miletus with the ships, since it is friendly to Tissaphernes. 
 [H. 925: G. 1505: B. 598: Go. 629.] 
 
 65. The first person of the Subjunctive is used in ques- 
 tions of Appeal, where the speaker asks himself or another 
 what he is to do. The negative is |ITJ. In Attic Greek 
 this Subjunctive is often introduced by (JoiiXa or po-uXcaOc : 
 TOVTfr iroiTJao), shall I do this ? or poxiXci TO-UTO Troifj<ra>, 
 do you wish that I should do this ? TI |iT| CLTTCO, w hat shall 
 I not say ? [H. 866, 3, b: G. 1358: B. 577 : Go. 471.] 
 
 66. The Subjunctive (usually the Aorist), and some- 
 times the Future Indicative, with ov fj/rj may have the 
 force of an emphatic Future with oil : o-u |ITJ TOVTO -ya^Tai 
 (sometimes ov \vr\ TOVTO Y^vrjo-CTai), this will not happen, or 
 this surely zvill not happen ; oil |rrj iroff dXco, / will never 
 be caught. [H. 1032: G. 1360: B. 569, 2: Go. 489, a.] 
 
 67. f with the Genitive, through. 
 Sia 
 
 i with the Accusative, on account of. 
 
3O GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART I 
 
 with the Genitive, with. 
 
 |tTd 
 
 with the Accusative, after. 
 
 mptj 
 
 [ Wl 
 
 [ with the Genitive, concerning, about. 
 with the Accusative, around. 
 
 68c SUMMARY 
 
 Since he did this. 
 
 bri 
 
 TOVTO 
 
 we to do? TI -iroiTJ<reonV ; 
 
 // -/ ./ f Ov I 1 *! TOVTO TTOITJOT1. 
 
 2/^// not do this \ 
 
 [ OV pi TOVTO TTOITJCTCI. 
 
 Caution. Do not express questions like What shall I 
 do ? or Where shall I go ? where the speaker is in doubt, 
 by the Future Indicative. The Subjunctive is generally 
 used. 
 
 69. TRANSLATE: 
 
 1. Inasmuch as we do not follow him, he is not our pay- 
 
 master. 
 
 2. Where shall I see her ? 
 
 3. On account of this he found his friend. 
 
 4. Hereafter 1 I will not wait for them. . 
 
 5. Shall I proceed with the army through the middle of 
 
 the village ? 
 
 1 Hereafter = after this. , 
 
WISHES 31 
 
 6. Let us not go with the king. 
 
 7. Will you reply, 1 or shall I speak ? 
 
 8. Do not be cowards, simce the contest is about our 
 
 lives. 2 
 
 9. Do you wish, then, 3 that I should stop ? 
 10. What shall I give to each of my friends? 
 
 LESSON IX 
 WISHES OUGHT AND MUST 
 
 70. Wishes may be divided into two classes : 
 
 1. Those that refer to the future ; as may he do this, or 
 O that he may come. 
 
 2. Those that refer to present or past time, and that 
 wish for something which (it is implied) is not or was 
 not attained. They are commonly called Contrary to Fact 
 wishes ; as O that this had happened (implying that it did 
 not happen), or would that he were not here (implying that 
 he is here now). 
 
 71. i. Wishes that refer to the future are expressed by 
 the Optative, with or without i6 or cl -yap. The nega- 
 tive is |iVj. 
 
 2. The Future and Perfect tenses of the Optative are 
 not used in wishes. 
 
 8c TOVTO oi Ocoi 8otV, may the gods grant you this. 
 i9 [iT| ycvoiTO, O that it may not happen. [H. 870: G. 1507: 
 3.587: 60.476.] 
 
 1 Does this come under the rule in 65? 2 <r|xa, -arcs, r6. * ouv. 
 
32 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART I 
 
 72. Contrary to fact wishes may be expressed in two 
 ways : 
 
 1. By the past tenses of the Indicative with ctOc or t 
 yap. The Imperfect tense refers to present time, and the 
 Aorist to past time. The Pluperfect is not commonly 
 used. The negative is (1/q. 
 
 i6 |i ctScs, would that you had seen me (implying that he 
 
 did not see me). 
 I yip |U| Trappy, O that he were not present (implying that 
 
 he is present). 
 
 2. By oS<t>\ov, Aorist of 6<j>iXco, with the Present or 
 Aorist Infinitive, the Present Infinitive when the wish 
 refers to present time, and the Aorist when it refers to 
 past time. Negative [ITJ. The subject is Nominative, 
 subject of o><|>Xov, not Accusative, subject of the Infini- 
 tive. 
 
 oS<j>\S |JL ISctv, would that you had seen me (literally, you 
 
 ought to have seen me). 
 oS<t>\ |it| irapctvat, O that he were not present (literally, lie 
 
 ought not to be present). [H. 871, a \ G. 151 1, 1512 : B. 588 -. Go. 470.] 
 
 73. English expressions that employ the auxiliary verbs 
 Ought or Must, such as you ought to go, he must do this, are 
 expressed in Greek in several ways. The English construc- 
 tion is generally personal, while the Greek phrase is gener- 
 ally impersonal. 
 
 74. The Greek constructions in common use are : 
 
 I. Set with the Accusative and Infinitive 1 ougJit or 
 rj with the Accusative and Infinitive J must. 
 
OUGHT AND MUST 33 
 
 2. Verbal adjectives in TC'OS 
 
 dvdvKTj, with or without Icrri, and the 
 
 must 
 Accusative (sometimes Dative) and 
 
 Infinitive 
 Examples :^ 
 
 TOVTO aVTW TTOLTITCOV (4<TTl) 1 rr 
 
 ,,",,,> ~ \Hemustdothis. 
 
 ,,,,,> ~ 
 ava"yKt] (<rri) avTov TOVTO 
 
 Set O/UTOV ToaiTO Troifj<rai 1 He ought to do this, or He 
 avrov TOVTO iroifjcrai 
 
 75. The student will remember the following facts about 
 the use of verbal adjectives in TCOS : 
 
 1. -T&S is added to that theme of the verb which is 
 obtained by removing the augment and ending of the 
 First Aorist passive. 
 
 2. The verbal, when used in the personal construction, 
 is always passive in sense, and expresses Necessity. The 
 agent is expressed by the Dative. 
 
 3. The verbal, when used in the impersonal construction 
 (and this is more common), is in the Nominative neuter 
 singular (sometimes plural) with Icrri expressed or under- 
 stood. In this use it is practically active in sense and 
 takes an object the same as its verb. The agent is 
 expressed by the Dative. 
 
 4. In using the verbal, always recast an active English 
 sentence to its corresponding passive form, as we must do 
 this to it must be done this by us, or this mtist be done by 
 us before turning the sentence into Greek. 
 
 TTurTOV <rr! T<3 crTpaTTj-ycS VJJLLV, you must obey your gen- 
 eral (literally, it must be obeyed your general by you\ 
 [H. 988-992: G. 1594-1597 ' B - 2 35 663-666: Go. 352-354, 596.] 
 
 GK. PROSE COMP. 3 
 
34 
 
 GREEK PROSE CUMFUbl HON PART I 
 
 Caution. In using the impersonals Set and XP 1 !* do 
 not employ the Dative and the Infinitive after them ; the 
 Accusative and the Infinitive is the common Greek usage. 
 This mistake is very natural, as the impersonal English 
 form is it is necessary for him, etc. 
 
 76. 
 
 WISHES. 
 Negative |i4 
 
 SUMMARY OF THE WISH CONSTRUCTIONS 
 
 _ ... ( Present or Aonst Optative, with or with- 
 Posszble. \ _ ' 
 
 I out 6\:0 or d -ydp. 
 
 II. 
 
 Contrary 
 to Fact. 
 
 Present j 
 Time. | 
 
 Past 
 Time. 
 
 :0 or cl -yap and Imperfect In- 
 dicative, or otycXov and Pres- 
 ent Infinitive. 
 
 !0c or cl -ydp and Aorist Indic- 
 ative, or w<j>\ov and Aorist 
 Infinitive. 
 
 77. TRANSLATE : 
 
 1. We must proceed for a day through the plain. 
 
 2. May he never find his friends. 
 
 3. The man ought to obey his king. 
 
 4. Would that Cyrus were not marching inland. 1 
 
 5. On the following day he said, " O that I had not fought 
 
 the Greeks." 
 
 6. Since Cyrus is our genersi, we ought not to disobey 
 
 him. 
 
 7. The whole army must learn this. 
 
 8. We must not await the enemy. 
 
 9. Would that the king's men 2 had not fled into the 
 
 camp. 
 10. May he not do harm to me. 
 
 1 dvapcUvw. 
 
 2 the king's men = the king and those with him. 
 
PURPOSE CLAUSES 35 
 
 LESSON X 
 
 PURPOSE AND OBJECT CLAUSES 
 
 78. A Purpose clause is one which expresses the end 
 or purpose of the action of a verb. 
 
 In English, purpose is indicated in a variety of ways. 
 In the sentence He came to see me, the purpose clause 
 to see me may be expressed in order that he might see 
 me, or for the purpose of seeing me> or in order to see 
 me> etc. 
 
 79. The following are the common ways of expressing 
 purpose in Greek : . 
 
 1. Iva, <bs, 8ira>s and the Subjunctive or Optative. 
 
 2. The Infinitive. 
 
 3. The Future Party 
 
 4. A relative with tlf^Future Indicative. 
 
 [H. 881, 951, 969, r, 911: G. 1365,^1369, 1532, 1442, 1563,4: B. 590-592, 
 
 653, 5 : Go. 565, a, 615, 636, 638, 642.] 
 
 80. In expressing purpose IVJOL, cbs, 1 or OTTCOS take the 
 Subjunctive when the ma^n verb is a primary tense, and 
 the Optatiye^when the main VOT^S secondary. On the 
 principle of indirect discourse the Subjunctive is often 
 used after a secondary tense. The negative is [ir\. 
 
 ?p)(Tai 'va TO-UTO tS'Q, he is coming in order that he may 
 see this. 
 
 iva TOVTO ISoi, he came that he might see this. 
 
 1 This word is used by Xenophon, but is not Attie Greek. Avoid its use. 
 
36 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART I 
 
 81. 'Qs is often used with the Future Participle to express 
 purpose, indicating the Presumed or Intended rather than 
 the Real purpose. 
 
 TJXScv cbs 8iaX|6[iv6s |ioi, he came (as though) to speak 
 with me. [H. 978: G. 1574: B. 656, 3: Go. 593, c.~] 
 
 82. The sentence He sent a man to see me might be 
 expressed in Greek in the following ways : 
 
 iva 
 
 TTfi\|/v avSpa cos 
 
 Sircos 
 Iva 
 
 eTTp.\|/v dv8pa cbs 
 
 1601. 
 
 . H* 
 OTTCOS 
 
 avSpa 6\|/6|iv6v |ic. .-- 
 avSpa 8s (or Sorts) |i oxf/crai. 
 avSpa |i ISetv. 
 
 83. After verbs which signify to Care for, Strive for, 
 Effect, and Plan, the object of the action is expressed by 
 8rro>s, that, and STTCOS |ITJ, that not, with the Future Indicative, 
 after both primary and secondary tenses. The Subjunctive 
 and Optative also are used, but less frequently than the Fu- 
 ture Indicative : eirifieXciTai OTTCDS pi ycvrjo'CTai, he takes 
 care that it may not happen ; (JouXeiieTai OTTCOS H/HTTOTC en 
 carat irl T<3 d8Xc))c3, he plans how he may never again be in 
 the power of his brother. [H. 885 : G. 1372: B. 593: Go. 638, a.] 
 
 84. Verbs and phrases which express or imply Fear, 
 Caution, or Danger take JITJ, lest or that, or JJLT| oil, that not, 
 with the Subjunctive, if the main verb is primary, and with 
 the Optative, if the main verb is secondary. The Subjunc- 
 tive may be retained after a secondary tense : ScSoiKa \LT\ 
 
REVIEW 37 
 
 i, I fear that it may happen ; eScicra [Xt] ov 
 (or "yVT|Tai), I feared that it would not happen. [H. 887; G. 
 1378: B. 594: Go. 610, 611.] 
 
 85. TRANSLATE : 
 
 1. They asked Cyrus for boats, that they might sail away. 
 
 2. They are afraid that the enemy will attack them. 
 
 3. See to it that you are brave. 
 
 4. He collected an army as though to make war on the 
 
 Thracians. 
 
 5. O that he were present, that I might see him. 
 
 6. He was on his guard lest the Greeks should attack him 
 
 as he was going away. 
 
 7. I am doing this that my friend may not suffer harm. 
 
 8. He took care that the barbarian should never again 
 
 capture him. 
 
 
 
 LESSON XI 
 
 REVIEW 
 
 86. Review all the principles stated in 56-84. 
 
 87. Learn thoroughly the meaning of the following 
 words, memorizing the principal parts of all the verbs : 
 
 1. d8\)(io) 9. 6i)pa 
 
 2. Ti|icuo 10. 
 
 3. vavrtis ii. OTTOU 
 
 4. pdXXco 12. ippi<TKeo 
 
 5. irapcuD 13. Sia 
 
 6. 4mTrj8ia 14. 
 
 7. K\UO 15. 
 
 8. 6a\>n,ao> 16. 
 
GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART I 
 
 17. iraxico (act. and mid. 1 ) 
 
 1 8. Ka(TTOS 
 IQ. 
 
 20. 
 
 21. dvapaivco 
 
 22. 
 23. 
 24. 
 
 25. 
 
 26. 8'8oLKa, 
 
 27. <|)op<i> (act and mid. 2 ) 
 
 28. <rKOTT(D 
 
 29. cruXXc-yeo 
 
 30. <j>\)XdTT<o (mid.) 
 
 3 1 . ImiicXcofiai 
 
 32. alpco, dXicrKO|iai 
 
 88. Keep in mind the following facts in regard to the 
 formation, conjugation, and accent of the Second Aorist 
 tense system : 
 
 1. In most Second Aorists the Indicative is conjugated 
 like the Imperfect. The other moods are formed like the 
 Present tense of those moods. 
 
 2. The irregularities in accent are : the Second Aorist 
 active Infinitive and the Second Aorist middle Imperative 
 circumflex the ultima ; the Second Aorist active Participle 
 and the five active Imperatives, clire, X0, vp, Xo,pe, ISe, 
 behold, have the acute on the ultima; the Second Aorist 
 middle Infinitive of verbs in co has the acute on the penult. 
 
 As an example, the complete synopsis of the Second 
 Aorist system of Xcnrco is given. 
 
 Ind. 
 
 Subj. 
 
 Opt. 
 
 Imp. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 Part. 
 
 ACTIVE 
 IfXiirov 
 
 XlTT 
 
 Xitrctv 
 Xiirwv 
 
 Ind. 
 
 Subj.. 
 
 Opt. 
 
 Imp. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 Part. 
 
 MIDDLE 
 
 \lir6|JLT]V 
 
 X.iiroCfj.Tjv 
 \iirov 
 Xiir(r0ai 
 \iir 
 
 1 In the active it means make stop, in the middle cease. 
 
 2 In the active frighten, in the middle be afraid. 
 
CONDITIONS 39 
 
 89. Several common verbs have Second Aorist systems 
 formed and conjugated like those of \LI verbs. A few of 
 these synopses are given below, and should be thoroughly 
 learned. 
 
 dXCo-KOficu, paivco, -yi-yvwo-KW, 
 
 be captured go know 
 
 Ind. cdXwv or v\\a>v cp-qv c-yvcov 
 
 Subj. dXw P -yvw 
 
 Opt. dXotTjv PCUT]V -yvoCriv 
 
 Imp. Pf)9i -yvwOt 
 
 Inf. dXwvat Pf]vai -yvwvai 
 
 Part. dXovs pds -yvovs 
 
 NOTE. 6'p-qv is conjugated like the First Aorist passive 
 of a regular verb. cdXcov and eyvcov in the same way 
 retain co throughout. 
 
 90. Write the synopses of all the Second Aorists in 87. 
 
 91. Let the instructor form several original sentences 
 in English from the words in 87, illustrating the gram- 
 matical principles of 56-85. Let these sentences be 
 given to the class to write at sight. 
 
 LESSON XII 
 
 PARTICULAR CONDITIONS : SIMPLE AND CONTRARY TO FACT 
 
 92. There are two main classes of conditions, (i) those 
 that refer to a single definite act, called Particular Condi- 
 tions, and (2) those that refer to any one of a series of acts, 
 called General Conditions. Example : If he does this, he 
 is punished, where the condition refers to single, specific 
 
40 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART I 
 
 occurrence. If this condition is put in the form If he ever 
 does this, he always is punished, it becomes a general con- 
 dition, because it refers to any one of a series of acts, and 
 not to a specific one. 
 
 A general condition, then, in English, may usually be 
 recognized by the word ever, always, as often as. 
 
 93. Particular Conditions are, for convenience, divided 
 into four forms : 
 
 1. Simple. 
 
 2. Contrary to Fact (Non-Fact). 
 
 3. More Vivid Future. 
 
 4. Less Vivid Future (Vague Future). 
 
 94. Simple Condition. In this form the protasis (or 
 condition) simply states a present or past supposition, and 
 does not imply anything as to its fulfilment. The prota- 
 sis has i, if, with the present or past Indicative, and any 
 form of the verb may stand in the apodosis(or conclusion). 
 
 cl irpa| TOVTO, KaXcos (T)(V, if he did tJiis, it was well. 
 dXV el 8oKt, irXo)|iV, but if it pleases you, let us sail. 
 
 [H. 893: G. 1390: B. 602: Go. 647.] 
 
 95. i. Contrary to Fact Condition. When the prota- 
 sis states a present or past supposition, implying that the 
 condition is not or was not fulfilled, the secondary tenses 
 of the Indicative are used in both protasis and apodosis. 
 The apodosis has the adverb civ. 
 
 2. The Imperfect here refers to present time, and the 
 Aorist to past time. The Pluperfect is not often used. 
 The Imperfect may refer to an act as going on or repeated 
 in past time. 
 
CONDITIONS 41 
 
 Kai av Tavr erroici, i <opa T||JLds, and he would be doing 
 this, if he saw us (implying that he did not see us). 
 
 i fill TavTo, errpa|av, OVK av KaX&s eVx^v, if they had not 
 done this, it would not have been well (implying that they 
 did do this). 
 
 The first example is in present time and employs the 
 Imperfect, while the second is past time and employs 
 the Aorist [H. 895: G. 1397: B. 606: Go. 649.] 
 
 96. In all conditions \LT\ is the regular negative of the 
 protasis, and ov of the apodosis. 
 
 97. The student will notice that the only way of distin- 
 guishing a past simple condition from a past contrary to 
 fact is the_dv of the conclusion, as both may employ the 
 Aorist Indicative in both parts. 
 
 i Tavra irpa|av, KaXcos <r)(V, if they did this, it was 
 
 well (simple). 
 cl TaOra errpa|av, KaXcos av <rxV, if they had done this, 
 
 it would have been well (contrary to fact). 
 
 Caution. Observe how important the av is ; it may 
 change the whole meaning of a sentence. 
 
 98. TRANSLATE: 
 
 1. If any one is brave, let us choose him general. 
 
 2. If Cyrus had restrained himself, he would have been 
 
 king. 
 
 3. If he came, he marched through the city. 
 
 4. If the general had wished to go, the soldiers would 
 
 have followed him. 
 
42 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART I 
 
 5. If any one knows this, let him speak. , 
 
 6. He would persuade me, if my father were not here. 
 
 7. If you had not come, we should now be proceeding 
 
 against the king. 
 
 8. Change i to a contrary to fact condition, past time, 
 
 and write in Greek. 
 
 9. Change 3 to a contrary to fact condition, past time, 
 
 and write in Greek. 
 
 LESSON XIII 
 PARTICULAR CONDITIONS VIVID AND LESS VIVID FUTURE 
 
 99. Review 92 and 93. 
 
 100. More Vivid Future Condition. When a supposed 
 future case is stated distinctly and vividly (as in English, 
 if I shall go, or if I go\ the protasis has the Subjunctive 
 with cdv, T]V, or av, and the apodosis has the Future Indica- 
 tive or some other form expressing future time. 
 
 This form of condition, then, is recognized in English 
 by the auxiliaries shall and will. 
 
 Idv fiTj cXe-fls, <rrai <roi Kaicd, if you will not come (or do 
 not come), you will have trouble. [H. 898, 899: G. 1403, 1405 : 
 
 B. 604 : Go. 650.] 
 
 101. As a still more vivid form of expression, cl and the 
 Future Indicative may be used in the protasis, instead of 
 cdv and the Subjunctive. 
 
 Caution. The auxiliary shall or will is not necessary 
 to express future time in English. In the clause if he 
 
FUTURE CONDITIONS 43 
 
 goes, the English Present may be used in the sense of will 
 go. Remember, then, that many vivid futures have shall 
 or will only in the conclusion. 
 
 102. 'Edv (sometimes contracted to rjv and av) is a com- 
 pound of i and civ. 
 
 103 Less Vivid Future Conditions. i. When a sup- 
 posed future case is stated in a less distinct or vivid form 
 (as in English, if I should go), the protasis has the Opta- 
 tive with i, and the apodosis has the Optative with av: 
 ct irXowios ycvoio, TIVOS av Scoio ; if you should be rich, 
 what would you want f 
 
 2. The Future Optative is not used in this construction. 
 
 3. This form of condition is recognized in English by 
 the auxiliaries should or would in both parts of the condi- 
 tion. [H. 900: G. 1408: 6.605: 60.651.] 
 
 104. In suppositions, especially less vivid future and 
 contrary to fact conditions, the condition is often left to 
 be understood, or is expressed by the participle. 
 
 Kdi CTW XJfJAV |1V CIV IT)V TljUOS, XlfiCOV & pT|[10S 0>V OVK (XV 
 
 licavos ii]v, and with you (i.e. if I should be with you)/ 
 should be in honor, but if I sJiould be (literally, being) 
 deprived of you, I should not be able, etc. [H. 903, 969, d: 
 G. 1413: B. 614: Go. 583.] 
 
 105. TRANSLATE: 
 
 1. If we take this height, those above the road 1 will not 
 
 be able to attack us. 
 
 2. If he will come, what shall we do ? 2 
 
 1 01 VTTp TT1S 680V. 
 
 2 Is it correct to use the Future Indicative? 
 
44 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART I 
 
 3. Cyrus said, "If the king should fight within ten days, 
 
 I would give you ten talents." 
 
 4. If he had come, we should have seen him. 
 
 5. I should hesitate to embark in those boats. 
 
 6. If this is so, I shall come. 
 
 7. If I should not be captured by the enemy, I should not 
 
 be killed. 
 
 8. If we should have 1 our arms, we would use our valor 
 
 also. 2 
 
 LESSON XIV 
 
 GENERAL CONDITIONS 
 
 106. Review 92 and 93. 
 
 107. The distinction of conditions as particular and 
 general is observed in all suppositions, but there is 
 no difference in the Greek form of expression except in 
 the first form, or simple conditions. Simple general con- 
 ditions are of two forms, present and past, according to 
 the time. 
 
 108. Present General Conditions. These are general 
 suppositions of present time implying nothing as to the 
 fulfilment. They employ the Subjunctive with iav, r\v 
 or av in the protasis, and the Present Indicative (or some 
 other present form denoting repetition) in the apodosis : 
 cdv KXcxJrfl, dXio-Kerai, if he ever steals, he is caught. [H. 894, 
 
 I : G. 1393, I : B. 609: Go. 650.] 
 
 1 Use the participle. 
 
 2 ica( before the word it emphasizes. 
 
GENERAL CONDITIONS 
 
 45 
 
 109. Past General Conditions. These employ the Opta- 
 tive with l in the protasis, and the Imperfect Indicative 
 (or some form denoting past repetition) in the apodosis : 
 i K\\|/<H, T|Xio-KTO, if he ever stole, he was caught. [H. 894, 
 
 2: G. 1393, 2: B. 610: Go. 651, (2).] 
 
 110. The Imperfect and Aorist Indicative are some- 
 times used with dv to express a customary action. 
 
 These forms, then, may be used in the conclusion of a 
 past general condition. Do not confuse this use of av 
 with the Imperfect and the Aorist, with dv used in the 
 conclusion of contrary to fact suppositions. [H. 894, a\ G. 
 
 1296: B. 610, n. i.] 
 
 111. 
 
 SUMMARY OF GENERAL CONDITIONS 
 
 GENERAL 
 CONDITIONS. 
 
 I. Simple. 
 
 { a. Present time : 4dv (TJV, dv) with Sub- 
 junctive in protasis ; Present In- 
 dicative in apodosis. 
 b. Past time : ct with Optative in prot- 
 asis ; Imperfect Indicative (or 
 Imperfect with dv, or Aorist with 
 
 I dv) in apodosis. 
 
 II. Contrary to Fact. Same as Particular (95). 
 
 III. More Vivid Future. Same as Particular (100). 
 
 IV. Less Vivid Future. Same as Particular (103). 
 
 112. TRANSLATE : 
 
 1. If he ever saw me, he ran away. 
 
 2. If his soldiers should march in good order, he would 
 
 praise them. 
 
 3. The enemy always escape, if we attack them. 
 
46 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART I 
 
 4. If you had ever come, he would have congratulated you. 
 
 5. If we ever saw her, she was always speaking about her 
 
 husband's l bravery. 
 
 6. The barbarians always tried to attack us, if we crossed 
 
 the river. 
 
 7. She used to march along with him. 
 
 8. If he ever promises you, he will not deceive you. 
 
 9. Cyrus is glad, if his soldiers never flee. 
 
 LESSON XV 
 
 RELATIVE CONDITIONS 
 
 113. A relative clause may have a conditional force, the 
 relative pronoun or adverb implying the idea of if; for 
 example, whatever he does, I praise him means if he does 
 anything, I praise him ; or, wherever he goes, I see him is 
 equivalent to saying if he goes anywhere, I see him. 
 
 The relative word, when used with this conditional 
 force, has an indefinite antecedent, that is, refers to an 
 uncertain or undetermined person or thing, place or time. 
 
 [H. 912: G. 1426, 1427: B. 620: Go. 616.] 
 
 114. i. Conditional relative clauses have forms corre- 
 sponding to the regular constructions used in conditional 
 sentences, the only difference being that the relative word 
 takes the place of l, if. 
 
 2. The av of lav is attached to the relative word, when- 
 ever the Subjunctive is used; thus, os civ, 6ir66V av, etc. 
 
RELATIVE CONDITIONS 
 
 47 
 
 With (>T, 6ir6T, iri, and errciSTJ, av is united and forms 
 orav, oTTorav, eirrjv or irdv, and iri8dv. The negative, 
 of course, is |nj. Example : The sentence whomever he 
 sees, I know is a relative clause with indefinite antecedent, 
 and is a present general condition in form, therefore it is 
 written in Greek just as a regular present general condi- 
 tion would be, the relative and civ taking the place of iav : 
 ovriva av IS-fl, yt-yvcoorKa). [H. 913: G. 1428, 1429: B. 621-625: 
 Go. 616, 617.] 
 
 115. The following summary will indicate the construc- 
 tions used in all kinds of conditional relative sentences : 
 
 ( Relative and Indicative in protasis; 
 
 \ . 
 
 [ any form in apodosis. 
 
 a. Present : Relative -f av and Sub- 
 
 junctive in protasis ; Present 
 Indicative in apodosis. 
 
 b. Past: Relative and Optative in 
 
 protasis ; Imperfect Indicative 
 in apodosis. 
 
 Relative and past tenses of Indi- 
 cative in protasis ; dv and past 
 tenses of Indicative in apodo- 
 sis. 
 
 > 
 
 
 Q 
 Z 
 
 o 
 u 
 
 I. Simple. 
 
 II. Contrary 
 
 to 
 Fact. 
 
 III. More 
 Vivid 
 
 Future. 
 
 IV. Less 
 
 Vivid 
 Future. 
 
 General. 
 
 Both particular 
 
 and 
 general. 
 
 Both particular ( Relative + dv and Subjunctive 
 
 and \ in protasis ; Future Indicative 
 
 general. I in apodosis. 
 
 Both particular f Relative and Optative in prota- 
 and I sis ; dv and Optative in apod- 
 
 general. ( osis. 
 
 The above table is a summary of the moods and tenses 
 used in all kinds of conditions. For all kinds of conditions, 
 See H. 889-918: G. 1381-1437: B. 599-625: Go. 616, 617, 645-656. 
 
4 8 
 
 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART I 
 
 with the Genitive. 
 
 116. The following are some of the more important 
 meanings of the preposition eiri with its different cases : 
 
 a. Of place, on or upon : 4-irl yr\s t on the 
 
 earth ; en-l TOV cvcovvfiou, on the left 
 wing. 
 
 b. With verbs of motion, towards, in the 
 
 direction of: cirl 'IwvCas, in the di- 
 rection of Ionia . 
 
 c. In the time of: <}>' ij^wv, in our 
 
 time. 
 
 d. Denoting distribution : lirl Tcrrapwy, 
 
 four deep ; <(>' c'vos, in single file. 
 4m \ ( a. Of place, at, by, near : cirl SaXdrrn, 
 
 at the sea. 
 
 b. In the power of: 4-irl TW dSX4>u>, in 
 the power of his brother. 
 
 a. To, against (with verbs of motion) : 
 
 irl paa-iXe'a, against the great king. 
 
 b. On, upon (with verbs of motion) : 
 
 dva|3aiviv <)>' iirirov, to mount on 
 horseback. 
 
 c. Eoctending over (extent of space) : 4irl 
 
 iroXv, for a great distance. 
 
 with the Dative. 
 
 with the Accusative. 
 
 117. TRANSLATE : 
 
 1. Wherever Cyrus would go, his soldiers would follow. 
 
 2. Whenever the Greeks came to a river, they were afraid 
 
 that the enemy would attack them. 
 
 3. I know whatever he does. 
 
 4. She would have obeyed whatever he said. 
 
 5. Whenever they were drawn up three deep, they never 
 
 conquered. 
 
 6. They will use whatever arrows they take. 
 
 7. Whenever anyone wishes to go away, he permits him. 
 
 8. Wherever he went, he was in the power of his father. 
 
REVIEW 49 
 
 LESSON XVI 
 
 REVIEW 
 
 118. Review the principles stated in 92-116. 
 
 119. Learn thoroughly the meaning of the following 
 words and memorize the principal parts of all the verbs : 
 
 1. dvxo> (act. and mid.) 13. erraivco I/ 
 
 2. y i 'Y v< k (rKa> r 1 4- oiroi) V 
 
 3. alpo> 15. cdci) 
 
 4. ciXicrKOfjicu 1 6. d'rro<|>'u 4 Y< || > Y 
 
 5. Swajiai^/ 17. v8ai|iovi^a) 
 
 6. aicpov (plur.) ^ 18. 8ia,paiva> ^ 
 
 7. rdXavTov^ 19. TCITTCO 
 
 8. 8i8o)(JLi 20. vLKaca I/ 
 
 9. 6KV60) 1 I/ 21. f|TTClO|iai 
 
 10. dpTT| 22. clairardco i^ 
 
 11. |ipaivo> 23. fjSofjLai 
 
 12. -uTaKTa>s ]/ 24. diroSiSpdo-Kco \S 
 
 25. 
 
 120. Write out the synopsis of the second Aorist system 
 of verbs in the above list. 
 
 121. Let the instructor form several sentences employ- 
 ing the words in 119 and embodying the most important 
 of the grammatical principles in 92-116. These sentences 
 should be written in Greek, at sight, by the class. 
 
 1 Followed by the Infinitive, it means hesitate ; by jjf/j and the Subjunctive 
 or Optative, fear. 
 
 GK. PROSE COMP. 4 
 
50 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART I 
 
 LESSON XVII 
 
 BEFORE AND UNTIL 
 
 122. Until in its meaning may refer to either definite or 
 indefinite time: I. If we say, / waited until they arrived, 
 I did not go away until I had found it, or, in general, when 
 the reference is to a past action, we refer to a definite 
 point of time. 2. If we say, / shall not go away until I 
 see him, I waited until he should find it, or, in general, 
 when the reference is to future time, we have an indefi- 
 nite point of time, because the speaker implies that he 
 does not know when the decisive event will occur. 
 
 Until, then, refers to past or definite time, or to future 
 or indefinite time. 
 
 123. i. Until is expressed in Greek by o>s, <TT, 
 
 and |JXP l > Trpw a ls means until, but only after a negative 
 sentence. 
 
 2. When until refers to definite time, it takes the Indica- 
 tive mood, usually the Aorist tense : |iiva o>s a<(>iKovTo, 
 / waited until they arrived. [H. 922: G. 1464: B. 619: Go. 631.] 
 
 124. When until refers to indefinite time, av and the 
 Subjunctive is used after a primary tense, and the Optative, 
 without av, after a secondary tense. The Aorist is the tense 
 commonly used : [LCi\oi)\Lai H^XP 1 av TTJV irdXiv fe'Xco, I shall 
 fight until I shall take the city ; jJLiva ccos X6oi, / waited 
 until he should come. [H. 921 : G. 1465 : B. 626: Go. 631.] 
 
 125. IIpiv has two meanings. 
 
 i. After affirmative sentences it is naturally translated 
 before ; as, He went away before it was light. 
 
BEFORE AND UNTIL 
 
 2. After a negative sentence it is more naturally ren- 
 dered by until than before ; as, He did not go away until 
 it was light. 
 
 126. When irpiv means before, that is, after an affirma- 
 tive sentence, it takes the Infinitive with subject Accusa- 
 tive : ravTo, 8' eiroui<r irpiv a/UTOiis p. ISciv, he did this 
 before I saw them. [H. 955 : G. 1470: B. 645 : Go. 644.] 
 
 127. When irpiv means until, it employs the same con- 
 struction as cos, as explained in 123 and 124. [H. 924 : G. 
 
 1471, 2 : B. 627: Go. 644.] 
 
 128. The following table summarizes the moods and 
 tenses used after irpiv and ecos, &JTC, axpt> and 
 
 after Affirmative 1 
 
 Sentences Infinitive, 
 
 (meaning before). J 
 
 I. Definite Time. Indicative. 
 
 TTplV 
 
 after Negative 
 
 Sentences 
 (meaning until). 
 
 6S 
 <TT 
 
 ' a. After Primary 
 tense, av and 
 
 II. Indefinite Subjunctive. 
 
 Time. | b. After Secondary 
 
 tense, Optative until. 
 without dv. J 
 (The negative is ii-fj in all constructions.) 
 
 129. "E<os also means while, as long as, and in this sense 
 takes the Indicative. 
 
 General references, H. 920-924: G. 1463-1474: B. 619, 626, 627, 645: 
 Go. 631, 644. 
 
 130. TRANSLATE: 
 
 1 . Let the truce remain until he comes. 
 
 2. He used to arm himself 1 carefully before he fought. 
 
 1 What tense expresses used to ? 
 
52 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART I 
 
 3. She told the heralds to wait until she should be at leisure. 
 
 4. Do not do this until I come. 
 
 5. He did not set sail until he saw his mother. 
 
 6. He delayed until his soldiers should march through the 
 
 middle of the city. 
 
 7. If we had not known this, we would not have waited 
 
 until they arrived. 
 
 8. As long as he saw her, he waited at the door. 
 
 9. Let us proceed until we see him. 
 
 LESSON XVIII 
 
 INDIRECT DISCOURSE SIMPLE SENTENCES 
 
 131. The words or thoughts of any person may be quoted 
 either directly or indirectly. A direct quotation (i.e. direct 
 discourse) is one which gives the exact words or thoughts 
 of the original speaker or writer. An indirect quotation 
 (i.e. indirect discourse) is one in which the original words or 
 thoughts are stated in the words of another and conform to 
 the construction of the sentence in which they are quoted. 
 
 The English sentence " I am present," when quoted 
 indirectly, is stated " He says that he is present," or, when 
 quoted after a past tense of the verb of saying, " He said 
 that he was present." Indirect statement, then, is gener- 
 ally introduced in English by the word that. 
 
 132. An indirect statement in Greek may be introduced 
 
 (1) by on or o>s, corresponding to the English that ; 
 
 (2) sometimes by the Infinitive, without 8ri or o>s ; (3) some- 
 times also by the participle, without 8n or <bs. [H. 930: G. 
 1476: B. 670-673: Go. 659, 578, 586.] 
 
INDIRECT DISCOURSE S3 
 
 133. The following are the general principles of indirect 
 discourse as applied to simple sentences when 8n and <bs 
 are used : 
 
 1. After primary tenses, the verb retains both the mood 
 and tense of the direct discourse, no change being made 
 except (when necessary) in the person of the verb. 
 
 Direct discourse : irdpi|u, I am present. 
 Indirect discourse : Xc-yci on irdpccrnv, he says that he 
 is present. [H. 932, i : G. 1481, i : B. 672: Go. 624.] 
 
 2. After secondary tenses, each Indicative and each 
 Subjunctive of the direct discourse may be changed to 
 the same tense of the Optative, or retained in its original 
 mood and tense. 
 
 Exceptions. (i) The Imperfect and Pluperfect, having 
 no tenses in the Optative, are generally retained in the 
 Indicative. (2) Secondary tenses of the Indicative with 
 av are not changed to the Optative. 
 
 Direct discourse : cpx^Tat eiri TTJV irdXiv, he is coming 
 to the city. 
 
 Indirect discourse : fe'Xc-yev on cpxoiro errl TTJV irdXiv, he 
 said that he was coming to the city. 
 
 Direct discourse : vvv |JiV c'pxovrai irpdaOcv 8c av ^X6ov, 
 they are coming now, and would have come before. 
 
 Indirect Discourse : cXc^yov a>s KUV piv cpxoivro (or c'pxov- 
 Tai) irpdaOcv 8 av ^X9ov, they said that they were coming 
 now, and would have come before. 
 
 Notice that the tense of the verb never changes. 
 
 [H. 932, 2, 933, 935 : G - 1481, 2, 1482, 1493 : B. 674, 675 : Go. 659, <?.] 
 
 134. In writing sentences in indirect discourse, let the 
 Student always think of what the direct discourse was, and 
 
54 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART I 
 
 then change that direct discourse according to the princi- 
 ples stated in 133. 
 
 135. The negative in indirect discourse is generally the 
 same as it was in the direct discourse. [H. 1022: G. 1486: B. . 
 
 670, 3 : Go. 486.] 
 
 136. The student should notice carefully the difference 
 between indirect statements and indirect questions. As 
 has been stated before (131), indirect statements may be 
 recognized by the fact that the word that comes after the 
 introductory verb. An indirect question, however, states 
 indirectly a direct question, and has some interrogative 
 word after the introductory verb instead of that. 
 
 I know who is present (indirect question). 
 I know that he is present (indirect statement). 
 / heard where he went (indirect question). 
 / heard that he went (indirect statement). 
 
 137. After a primary tense, the verb of an indirect ques- 
 tion remains in the same mood and tense that was used in 
 the direct question ; after a secondary tense, it may remain 
 the same, or change to the same tense of the Optative. 
 
 [H. 930, 2: G. 1479: B. 673: Go. 661.] 
 
 ot8a OTTOI) <TTIV, / know where he is (the direct question 
 being irov !<TTIV); -qKoixra Girder^ TJ x^P a ' L ' t l I heard how 
 large the country was (the direct question being ir6<rr| TJ 
 X<opa <rriv). 
 
 138. TRANSLATE : 
 
 1. Tissaphernes reported that Cyrus was marching against 
 
 the king. 
 
 2. He said * that he would kill the horsemen who were 
 
 burning 2 the country ahead. 
 
 1 Do not use <|>T)|I(. 2 Use participle. 
 
INDIRECT DISCOURSE 55 
 
 3. They deliberated how 1 they should attack him. 
 
 4. I knew that the king would not have done this. 
 
 5. I say that Cyrus marched inland with a large army. 
 
 6. He heard that the enemy would not fight for ten days. 
 
 7. We asked him who this sailor was. 
 
 8. They perceived that the enemy were in the camp. 
 
 LESSON XIX 
 
 INDIRECT DISCOURSE INFINITIVE AND PARTICIPLE 
 
 Review 132. 
 
 139. i. After verbs of Saying and Thinking, which 
 introduce indirect discourse, the main verb is changed 
 to the corresponding tense of the Infinitive, after both 
 primary and secondary tenses. 
 
 Exception. Of the common verbs meaning to say, ctirov 
 takes the on or o>s construction with the Indicative or Opta- 
 tive ; Xeyco, in the active voice, generally takes on or <bs 
 and the Indicative or Optative, and in the passive voice 
 the_Jnfmitive; j)^[u regularly takes the Infinitive. 
 
 CLTTOV and (generally) \-yo>, therefore, are exceptions 
 to 139. 
 
 2. If av was used in the direct discourse, it is regularly 
 retained with the Infinitive in the indirect. 
 
 Direct discourse : irpoo-pxTai, he is approaching. 
 
 Indirect discourse : (|)T|)xi O/UTOV irpocrepxco'Oai, / say that 
 he is approaching. [H. 946: G. 1522, 1523: B. 669: Go. 658.] 
 
 1 What was the direct form ? 
 
56 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PAR r I 
 
 140. When the subject of the Infinitive is the same as 
 the subject of the introductory verb it is not expressed. 
 [H. 940: G. 895, 2: B. 646: Go. 571.] 
 
 141. As an exception to the principle stated in 135, verbs 
 of Hoping, Promising, and Swearing regularly have JJLTJ and 
 the Infinitive instead of ov. [H. 1024 : G. 1496 : B. 549, 2 : Go. 579, .] 
 
 142. After many verbs the participle may be used in 
 indirect discourse, each tense representing the correspond- 
 ing tense of the direct form. The participle retains the 
 av of the direct form. 
 
 Such verbs are those that signify to See, Know, Hear, 
 Learn, Perceive, Be Ignorant of, Remember, Forget, Show, 
 Appear, Prove, Acknowledge, and dyycXXo), to announce. 
 To this class belong the phrases 8t]X6s l|u and <|>avp6s 
 t|ii, <j>avpos *yiYVO|jLai, used personally. 
 
 NOTE. Most of these verbs may also take the 8ri or d>s 
 construction in indirect discourse. [H. 981,982: G. 1588, 1589: 
 B. 661 : Go. 586.] 
 
 Direct discourse : irpcxrepxerai, he is coming. 
 
 Indirect discourse : aKo-uco avrbv irpocrcpx^vov, I hear 
 that he is coming. This may also be written aicoveo on 
 
 Direct discourse : Trapt](rav, they were present. 
 
 Indirect discourse : eyveov a/Oro-us irapdvras, or c'-yvov OTL 
 
 / knew that they were present. 
 
 143. The phrases 8i}X6s cl|i.i, <j>avp6s cl|Li, and <|>avp&s 
 yiY i;o H Lai are used both personally and impersonally. When 
 used personally (which is more common) the participle 
 follows them ; when used impersonally they take 8ri or 
 <bs : KOpos Sf^Xos ^v TOIITO pouXojicvos, it was clear that 
 
INDIRECT DISCOURSE 57 
 
 Cyrus wished this, or Cyrus evidently ivished this (literally, 
 Cyrus was evident wishing this). 
 
 The student will notice that the construction commonly 
 used in English is impersonal. 
 
 144. TRANSLATE : 
 
 1. He announced that his own friends were approaching. 
 
 2. On account of this he thought he would run off. 
 
 3. It was evident that he had a large army. 
 
 4. I saw that you were suffering harm, and were not able 
 
 to retaliate. 
 
 5. They swore that they would never fight against their 
 
 own friends. 
 
 6. He said (e<iy) that they never betrayed their king. 
 
 7. The king's wife is said to have seen them. 
 
 8. Cyrus was evidently J in Cilicia. 
 
 LESSON XX 
 
 INDIRECT DISCOURSE COMPLEX SENTENCES 
 
 145. A complex sentence is one consisting of a principal 
 clause and one or more dependent clauses ; as " If he 
 comes, I shall go " ; " we waited until we saw her." " The 
 man whom I saw is a Greek." The dependent verbs are 
 italicized. 
 
 146. When a complex sentence is indirectly quoted, its 
 principal verb follows the rules stated in 133, 139, 141, and 
 142. Its dependent verb follows the following law : 
 
 1 What is the Greek idiom? 
 
58 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART I 
 
 After a primary tense, no change is made in the mood 
 or tense of the dependent verb. After a secondary tense, 
 no change may be made, or the dependent verb may 
 change to the same tense of the Optative, except that 
 dependent secondary tenses of the Indicative remain 
 unchanged. When a Subjunctive becomes Optative, dv 
 is dropped, 4dv becoming cl. 
 
 Direct discourse : os Trap^v, |i6s <|>iXos T\V, the man who 
 was present was a friend of mine. 
 
 Indirect discourse : <i$T] os Trapijv <|>iXov ivai, he said 
 that the man who was present was his friend. 
 
 In this sentence Trappy could not become Optative, 
 because it is a secondary tense in the dependent clause. 
 
 Direct discourse : Idv 'X8T|, avrov 6\J/o|iai, if he comes, I 
 shall see him. 
 
 Indirect discourse : ctirov 8ri, el \8oi, O/UTOV 6\|;oi|n]v, 
 I said that if he should come, I should see him. Both \6T| 
 and 6x|/o}iai might be unchanged. [H. 931, 932: 0.1497,1,2: 
 
 B. 672-675 : Go. 662.] 
 
 147. The principles stated in 146 apply also to any de- 
 pendent clause after a secondary tense (even if the clause 
 on which it depends is not quoted) that expresses indirectly 
 the past thought of any speaker. [H. 937: G. 1502: B. 677.] 
 
 148. The student will notice the difference between 
 " know that" and "know how to." If that introduces the 
 clause following know, the construction is indirect dis- 
 course, and the verb of knowing takes the participle or the 
 OTI or <5>s construction. If how to follows the word know, 
 the construction is not indirect discourse. The Infinitive 
 is then used. 
 
 ot8a avrov TOVTO iroiovvra, / know that he is doing this. 
 ot8a TOVTO iroii]<rai, / know how to do this. 
 
INDIRECT DISCOURSE 59 
 
 O, when followed by the Infinitive, often means 
 judge, decide. [H. 986: G. 1592, 2: B. 661, n. 3: Go. 588, <:.] 
 
 149. The student should remember the following facts 
 about the use of conditions in indirect discourse. 
 
 1. The protasis contains the dependent verb, and the 
 apodosis the main verb. 
 
 2. A contrary to fact condition never changes its mood 
 and tense after on or <bs, because it employs a secondary 
 tense in the protasis, and a secondary tense with civ in 
 the apodosis. 
 
 3. The protasis of the vivid and less vivid future may 
 be the same in indirect discourse ; the apodosis, therefore, 
 must be relied on to indicate the direct form of the condi- 
 
 tion (a) curev on, t \9oi, <xvapii<roiTO. 
 
 (b) nrV OTL, i X9oi, av dvapai-q. 
 
 Both are translated he said that if he should come he 
 would march inland, and it is, therefore, impossible from 
 the English sentence to tell what the direct form was. In 
 Greek, however, we can easily see that (a) was vivid future 
 in direct discourse, because the Future Optative is used in 
 the conclusion, and that (b) was less vivid because civ is 
 used in the conclusion. 
 
 150. In all indirect discourse sentences these three 
 points should always be in mind : 
 
 1. First find the direct form of the sentence. 
 
 2. Remember that all changes are made to the Optative 
 and not to the Subjunctive, as is the case with subordinate 
 clauses in Latin. 
 
 3. Do not change the tense. 
 
 Indirect discourse, H. 928-937, 946, 981, 982: G. 1475-1502, 1522, 1523, 
 1588, 1589: B. 646, 661, 668-677: Go. 657-664. 
 
60 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART I 
 
 151. TRANSLATE: 
 
 1. The sailor said that they would not set sail until the 
 
 admiral arrived. 
 
 2. He says (^>r]ai} that if he had done this he would have 
 
 been caught. 
 
 3. He replied, " Let us delay until we see them." 
 
 4. He promised that he would not give them up until they 
 
 should make a treaty. 
 
 5. They announced that they would follow him wherever 
 
 he should lead. 
 
 6. He does not know how to use his arms. 
 
 7. He said that wherever the Greek went the enemy 
 
 attacked them. 
 
 8. He knew that they would dread to embark on the boats 
 
 which Cyrus might give. 
 
 -* 
 
 LESSON XXI 
 
 REVIEW 
 
 152. Review the grammatical principles stated in 
 122-151. 
 
 153. The following synopsis of ot8a should be learned 
 Review the conjugation of all its tenses. [491: 820.] 
 
 Perf. otSa Opt. 
 
 Plupf. flSt] or flSciv Imp. *<r0i 
 
 Subj. cl8 Inf. cl&v 
 
 Part. clS4s 
 
RESULT CLAUSES 6 1 
 
 154. Learn the meaning of the following words. Mem- 
 orize the principal parts of all the verbs, and write out a 
 complete synopsis of the second aorist system of each verb 
 that has one. 
 
 1. oiria> 13. 
 
 2. <rxoXda> 14. irpoBiScojJLt 
 
 3. diroirXcco 15. irpocrepxoji 
 
 4. Siarpipo) 16. OKVC'CO 
 
 5. <nrv8<0 (mid.) 17. T\*y^o(jLai 
 
 6. o~irov8fj (plur.) 18. dyy^XXco 
 
 7. T|-y|JLcov 19. KaraKaco 
 
 8. linreiis 20. 
 
 9. ircos 21. 
 
 10. vaxiapxos 22. aKoxico 
 
 11. 6)ivv|ii 23. |iav6dvo> 
 12: irdcrxco 24. ol8a 
 
 155. Let the instructor form several sentences which 
 employ the words in 154, and which embody the most im- 
 portant of the grammatical principles in 122-151. These 
 
 sentences should be written in Greek, at sight, by the 
 class. 
 
 LESSON XXII 
 
 THE INFINITIVE RESULT CLAUSES 
 
 156. Review 78 and 79, 2. 
 
 157. The student should notice carefully the differ- 
 ence between a Purpose and a Result clause. A result 
 clause expresses the result or outcome of the action of 
 
62 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART I 
 
 a verb. Observe the difference as shown in these two 
 examples : 
 
 They shouted so that he might hear (Purpose). 
 They shouted so that he heard (Result). 
 
 Some word or phrase like so, such, in such a way, 
 etc., is often used in the sentence before the result clause 
 to lead up to it, and to show that such a clause is to 
 follow. 
 
 158. Result is generally expressed in Greek by <S<rr 
 (sometimes o>s) with the Accusative and Infinitive (nega- 
 tive (JLTJ), and the Indicative (negative oil). With the Infini- 
 tive, G>OT expresses the result which the action of the main 
 verb tends to produce, and with the Indicative, the result 
 actually produced. This distinction, however, which is 
 hardly perceptible in English, is often disregarded in 
 Greek : 
 
 OVTOS crrl 6av6s <5<rr 8iKt]v \M\ SiSdvcu, he is clever enough 
 
 not to be punished. 
 OVTCDS <rr! Savbs a><7T SIKTJV ov 8i8axriv, he is so clever 
 
 that he is not punished. 
 
 [H. 953* 927: G. 1449, H5 : B - 595 : Go - 5 66 &> 6 39 *-] 
 
 159. Result may be expressed by a relative pronoun 
 with the Indicative. The negative is ov. This occurs 
 chiefly after negative clauses, or interrogatives implying a 
 negative : 
 
 TIS OVTO) (icuvTai 8<rris ov poxiXcrai croi <|>iXos ctvai ; (Xen. 
 Anab. II, 5, 12.) Who is so mad that he does not wish 
 to become your friend? [H. 910: G. 1447: B. 597: Go. 619.] 
 
THE INFINITIVE 63 
 
 160. The Infinitive follows many adjectives that denote 
 Ability, Fitness, Desert, Willingness. Some of the com- 
 mon adjectives are Swards, able ; Scivds, skillful ; a|ios, 
 worthy ; ixavos, competent, able ; eroijios, ready. 
 
 dvTjp rd jjL-ydXa irpaTTCiv IKCLVOS, a man capable of doing 
 great things. [H. 952: G. 1526: B. 641 : Go. 565, <?.] 
 
 161. The Infinitive with the neuter article becomes a 
 verbal noun, being used in most of the constructions be- 
 longing to the different cases. This use of the Infinitive 
 corresponds to the Gerund in Latin. 
 
 LATIN 
 
 Nom. TO |j.dx<r0<u or )idxe<r6ai pugnare 
 Gen. TOV pdx<r6<u pugnandi 
 
 Dat. TW |idx<r0cu pugnando 
 
 Ace. r6 |idx<r0ai or pdxeo-Oou pugnandum 
 
 Here are a few examples of this use of the Infinitive : 
 
 cts T6 SUOKCIV <bp|iTJcra|iV, we set out in pursuit. 
 
 ^p|av TOV 8ia,paiViv, they began the crossing. 
 
 TI pa<riX<os dpx^l ^v T<3 Sico-irdo-eai rds 8wdjiis do-Ocvris, 
 
 the country of the king was weak in the scattered condition 
 of his forces. [H. 959: G. 1541-1547: B. 639-640: Go. 574-575.] 
 
 162. After verbs and expressions denoting Hindrance 
 or Freedom from anything, one may use (i) the simple 
 Infinitive or (2) TOV and the Infinitive. As the Infinitive 
 after verbs implying negation may take [ITJ to strengthen 
 the previous negation without otherwise affecting the sense, 
 one may use a third and fourth construction : (3) p/q and 
 the Infinitive and (4) TOV firj and the Infinitive. The Accu 
 sative TO JITJ and the Infinitive may also be used. 
 
64 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART I 
 
 ctp'ycv avTovs |idxo~9ai 
 
 ctpvcv CIVTOVS TOV itdYcaOai 
 
 ' , , , , A He prevented them 
 
 LpVV ttVTOVS U/h UtaY(TUaL [ - ^ , . 
 
 * , ' , , A /r^w fighting. 
 cip-ycv avTovs TOV (i/* 1 ^^-fli 
 
 avTOiFS TO \LT\ 
 
 [H. 963: G. 1549: B. 643: Go. 572-573.] 
 Infinitive, H. 938-964 : G. 1516-1556: 6.632-647: 60.562-579. 
 
 163. TRANSLATE: 
 
 1. Whenever he is skillful in speaking, I praise him. 
 
 2. The barbarians will never hinder us from crossing the 
 
 bridge. 
 
 3. When he was a boy, he was worthy of being honored. 
 
 4. They fought so bravely that they did not taste of food. 
 
 5. He always prevented his men from capturing women. 
 
 6. We went away in such a way as to frighten the citizens. 
 
 7. Who would be so foolish as not to obey his general ? 
 
 8. He accomplished this by being l brave. 
 
 9. Therefore we have come to save you. 
 
 LESSON XXIII 
 
 THE PARTICIPLE 
 
 164. The Participle has three uses : 
 
 1. It may qualify a noun, like an ordinary adjective. 
 
 2. It may define the circumstances under which the 
 action of the principal verb takes place. 
 
 1 IK TOV and Infinitive. 
 
THE PARTICIPLE 65 
 
 3. It may be joined to a verb to supplement or com- 
 plete its meaning, often having a force like that of the 
 Infinitive. 
 
 165. When the Participle qualifies a noun, Kke an attrib- 
 utive adjective, it may often be translated in English by 
 a relative clause, especially when it is preceded by the 
 article. 
 
 TOV pcwriXcxjovra d8\<j)6v, his brother, who is king. 
 
 dv6pS ol TOVTO iroiTJ<rovTS, men who will do this. See 40. 
 
 166. In defining the circumstances of the action of the 
 principal verb, the Participle may be translated in a variety 
 of ways, according as it expresses Time, Cause, Manner, 
 Means, Purpose, Condition, Concession, or Attendant Cir- 
 cumstance. 
 
 Time : dKowas TOVTO dircKpivaro, when he heard this, * 
 he replied. 
 
 Cause : ravra eiroiT|<r dmcvai pouX6p,Vos, he did this 
 because he wished to go away. 
 
 Purpose : cruXXaupdvci Kvpov a>s O/TTOKTCVCOV, he arrests 
 Cyrus as if to put him to death. See 79, 3. 
 
 Condition : VIKCOVTCS oiiScva dv Karaicdvoicv, if they 
 should conquer (literally, conquering), they would kill 
 nobody (the negative is n/rj). 
 
 Concession : TO/UTO, irTroiT|Ko>s OVK airwave, although 
 he had done the same things, he was not killed. [H. 969, a-e\ 
 
 G. 1563, 1-8: B. 653, 1-8: Go. 583.] 
 
 Remark. In writing Greek let the student endeavor 
 to use the Participle as much as possible, as participles 
 are much more common in Greek than they are in 
 English. 
 
 GK. PROSE COMP. 5 
 
66 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART I 
 
 167. The supplementary participle completes the idea 
 expressed by a verb, by stating that to which its action 
 relates. In this use it is very often similar to the object 
 Infinitive. It is often used in this sense with verbs that 
 signify to Begin, Continue, Cease, be Weary, be Pleased, 
 Displeased, or Ashamed. 
 
 ^PX OV X a ^ ira ^ va)V ^ was the first to be angry. 
 irawofiai Xc-ycov, / will cease talking. 
 
 [H. 980, 981 : G. 1580: B. 660: Go. 585, .] 
 
 168. When a circumstantial participle belongs to a 
 substantive which has no grammatical connection with the 
 main construction of the sentence, both the substantive 
 and the participle are put in the Genitive. This is called 
 the Genitive Absolute. 
 
 The Genitive Absolute may express any one of the ideas 
 mentioned in 166. 
 
 TCOV 'EXXfjvcov raOra TTOIOVVTCOV, oi pdppapoi din]X6ov, 
 
 while the Greeks were doing this y the barbarians went 
 off. 
 
 The student will notice that the Genitive Absolute may 
 be used in the above example, because the word Greeks 
 has nothing to do, grammatically, with the main clause 
 the barbarians went off. [H. 970: G. 1568: B. 657: Go. 590.] 
 
 169. The use of the Participle with the verbs XavBdvo, 
 escape the notice of, Tvy\av&, happen, and cj>0dvco, anticipate, 
 requires careful attention. 
 
 The use of these verbs in Greek is very idiomatic and 
 quite different from the English idiom. The translation 
 will vary. The Participle generally contains the main 
 
THE PARTICIPLE 67 
 
 idea of the sentence, while an adverb or a phrase will 
 usually best translate the main verb of the Greek sen- 
 tence. 
 
 \av0dvo> conveys the idea of unobserved, secretly, unseen, 
 
 etc. 
 Tvy)(av<D the idea of perchance, as it happened, as luck 
 
 would have it, etc. 
 <|>8dva> the idea of first, beforehand, etc. 
 
 Study these examples carefully : 
 
 T\i'YX aV irapwv, as it happened he was present or he was 
 present by chance (literally, he happened being present}. 
 
 \dv9avV dmcov, he went off without being seen, or he went 
 off secretly (literally, he escaped notice going away). 
 
 <|)9acrav T|}ias ravra TTOIOVVTCS, they did this before we did 
 (literally, they anticipated us in doing this}. H. 984 : G. 1 586 : 
 
 B. 660, note : Go. 585, a.'] 
 
 170. TRANSLATE : 
 
 1. If we should cross the river, whom would they kill ? 
 
 2. I shall never cease to pity you and deem happy those 
 
 who march with the king. 
 
 3. Although he knows that the enemy are coming, he 
 
 does not fear. 
 
 4. He went secretly and took the height. 
 
 5. He did this by chance, when Cyrus was speaking to 
 
 his soldiers. 
 
 6. When he had read the letter, he blamed him. 
 
 7. They arrived at the wall before the enemy. 
 
 8. The king thinks that the Greeks are his, since he has 
 
 them in his country. 
 
 Participle, H. 965-987= G. 1557-1593: B. 648-662: Go. 580-595. 
 
PART II 
 
 NOTES ON CONNECTIVES 
 
 Compare the following examples of standard English 
 and Greek prose, noticing especially the use of the con- 
 nectives in the two languages : 
 
 (FROM LINCOLN'S GETTYSBURG ADDRESS) 
 
 " Fourscore and seven years ago our fathers brought 
 forth upon this continent a new nation, conceived in lib- 
 erty, and dedicated to the proposition that all men are 
 created equal. Now we are engaged in a great civil war, 
 testing whether that nation, or any nation so conceived 
 and so dedicated, can long endure. We are met on a 
 great battlefield of that war. We have come to dedicate 
 a portion of that field as a final resting place for those who 
 here gave their lives that that nation might live." 
 
 (THUCYDIDES, I, 46 ff.) 
 
 at (JiV 8i] i>r}e9 afyucvovvrat e? rrjv Kep/cvpav, ol 8 "KopivOioi, 
 avrois Trapea/cevaa-TO, eirXeov CTTI rrjv Kep/cvpav vavcrl 
 
 /cal e/carov. rjcrav 84 'HXetW fiV e'/ea, 
 pecov Sc SwSe/ca ical Aevtcaftfov Se/ca, 'AfJLTrpa/citoT&v 8c eT 
 ical eticocrt ical ' KvaKTOpiw pia, avrwv 6k KopivOicov evevij- 
 Kovra a-rparrjjol 8c TOVTWV rjcrav (UV teal Kara 7ro\^9 e/ca- 
 
 6 
 68 
 
NOTES ON CONNECTIVES t>9 
 
 The student will readily notice the difference in style in 
 the two languages. Simple, vigorous English generally 
 abounds in short, disconnected sentences. The Greek 
 language, however, marks very carefully the connection 
 of sentences and clauses, and, by the free use of particles, 
 indicates fine shades of contrast which can be expressed 
 in English only by the stress of the voice. 
 
 Remember, then, generally to begin each clause in 
 Greek with a connective or particle, and to mark, by 
 the use of the proper particle, the contrasted words or 
 expressions. 
 
 There follows a list of the common connectives and 
 particles. In case of doubt as to the proper use of any 
 one of them, consult a Greek-English lexicon to see the 
 Greek usage. Those marked f cannot come first in the 
 sentence. 
 
 And: KOI, f^, rarely enclitic \iL 
 
 Also, even: KOI. 
 
 But: dXXd, \bi (with or without a preceding fH^v). 
 
 For: f-ydp (Kai -yap and dXXd -ydp are often found at the be- 
 ginning of a sentence, where we usually say/<?rand but). 
 
 Therefore : fow, froivuv, 8id TOVTO, rot-yap, roryapovv. 
 
 However: f|Uvrou 
 
 Yet, nevertheless : opxos, KOITOI. 
 
 At least, at any rate: enclitic f-yc, f-yovv. ^ is often 
 attached to pronouns : 6-yory^ 
 
 Of course, then: f8fj. This particle has a great variety 
 of meanings according to the connection in which it is 
 used. It often corresponds to of course, you know, you 
 see, then, there, etc. Very frequently it gives strength 
 or definiteness to another particle : v6a 8rj, then indeed. 
 
70 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART II 
 
 Not even : 
 
 And not: otiSc (when a negative clause precedes). 
 
 Neither . . . nor: OVT* . . . OVT. 
 
 When |iTJ is the proper negative, use it in place of ov in 
 all compounds, as H.TJT, etc. 
 
 The use of |iV and 8c should be carefully noticed. They 
 are used to contrast words and clauses whose contrast in 
 English is often indicated merely by the stress of the 
 voice, as irpo-pijTpos |iV ' ApTa|p|-qs, va>Tpos 8 Kvpos, 
 "the older Artaxerxes, the younger Cyrus." 
 
 |iv does not connect its clause with what precedes, but 
 looks forward, generally to a 8 which is to follow. 
 
 Kai ^dp often occurs at the beginning of a sentence, and 
 implies that something is omitted which may be easily 
 supplied from the context : v8a 8i] eyi/yvcoo-Kero on \nr6- 
 ircjiTTTos iil KCU -yap Ttov Ti(T(ra(|>'pvo\)S TIS OIKCUOV irapTi- 
 KoXo\)0TJKi m<rros VKa, then indeed it became known that 
 he had been sent underhandedly ; and (that was the case} 
 for one of Tissaphernes relatives followed to ensure his 
 fidelity. 
 
 In the expression dXXd -yap something is easily inferred 
 from the context between dXXd and 
 
 REMARKS ON TRANSLATION 
 
 One may be able to translate correctly an English sen- 
 tence, word for word, into Greek, and yet not be able to 
 write real Greek. The Greeks had a natural way of 
 expressing their thoughts that is not like the English 
 form of expression. The student in all of his study, then, 
 should aim to understand this spirit of the Greek language, 
 else he will never be able to write real Greek. 
 
REMARKS ON TRANSLATION 71 
 
 Take the English sentence " He made this promise." 
 Translated, word for word, it would be iroLi]cr Ta-ur-qv 
 rqv irrr6<rx(7iv, but such a rendering would not be correct, 
 for the Greeks would probably say, To/Ora irrrco-x^TO, " he 
 promised this." The student will notice, therefore, that 
 the English language uses a large number of abstract 
 words whose thought would be rendered in Greek by 
 verbs. In writing Greek always strive to remove from 
 the English sentence its form of expression, and think 
 only of the fact or idea that is being related ; then trans- 
 late that idea into Greek as simply as possible. 
 
 Study the following examples : 
 
 After the arrival of the generals, errei ol o-TpaTTj-yol <X<|H- 
 KOVTO. (Literally, "When the generals arrived.") 
 
 I remembered her personal feelings, ||JL|IVT)|JLT|V a uirri] 
 pov\TO. (Literally, " I remembered what she herself 
 wished.") 
 
 They reported the details of the battle, TiyyciXav <*>S Ka- 
 <rra Iv TTJ p.axn eyVTo. (Literally, "They reported 
 how each thing took place in the battle.") 
 
EXERCISES BASED ON THE ANABASIS 
 
 (" Sec." refers to the Section of the Chapter) 
 
 BOOK I CHAPTER I 
 
 171. Sec. 1-2. 
 
 1. Darius happened 1 to send for Cyrus. 
 
 2. Cyrus will collect all on the plain of Castolus. 
 
 3. Therefore he wishes to march inland. 2 
 
 4. Tissaphernes, as it happens, 3 is not his friend. 
 
 172. Sec. 3-5. 
 
 1. They said that he was plotting 4 against the king. 
 
 2. His mother does not wish Cyrus to be in the king's 
 
 power. 
 
 3. He was arrested because he slandered 5 Tissaphernes. 
 
 4. Cyrus planned so that his friends could wage war. 6 
 
 173. Sec. 6-7. 
 
 1. He is making a levy in order to collect the very best 
 
 men. 
 
 2. The king gave to Tissaphernes all 7 the cities, except 
 
 Miletus. 
 
 1 Use rtryxdvo) : H. 984 : G. 1586 : B. 660, note : Go. 585, a. * march in- 
 land: the Greek word means to go up. 3 as it happens : see 169. 4 he 
 was plotting: the direct discourse was^<? is plotting. Does the tense change ? 
 5 because he slandered: use the participle. so that . . . war: this is a 
 result clause. H. 927 : G. 1449-50 : B. 595 : Go. 566, b, 639, a. 7 H. 672 : 
 G. 979 : B. 454, 455. 
 
 7 2 
 
ANABASIS BOOK I, CHAP. II 73 
 
 3. He became aware beforehand that Cyrus was collect- 
 
 ing 1 an army. 
 
 4. He will kill those who plan 2 the same things. 
 
 /r 
 
 174. Sec. 8-9. 
 
 1. Cyrus' mother thought that the king did not perceive 
 
 the plot. 
 
 2. So that Cyrus waged war against Tissaphernes. 
 
 3. Cyrus met the fugitive and gave 3 him this money. 
 
 4. Another army will be secretly 4 supported among the 
 
 Thracians. 
 
 175. Sec. lo-n. 
 
 1. Since Aristippus happened to be hard pressed, he 
 
 asked Cyrus for gold. 6 
 
 2. He requested 6 his guest to overcome his opponents. 
 
 3. He will not take the men until 7 he wages war with 
 
 them. 
 
 4. The Pisidians will never trouble my land. 
 
 BOOK I CHAPTER II 
 
 176. Sec. 1-4. 
 
 1. Clearchus resolved to take as large an army as he had. 
 
 2. He promised us that he would not 8 stop until we 9 
 
 obeyed him. 
 
 1 that . . . collecting: H. 982: G. 1588: B. 66 1 : Go. 586. 2 those who 
 plan : use the article and the participle. See 40. 3 met and . . . gave = 
 having met, gave. Use the Aorist participle. 4 Use XavOdvco. 5 H. 724 : 
 G. 1069 : B. 340 : Go. 535. 6 Study in the vocabulary the various uses of 
 Sew, and notice that it governs the Genitive. 7 Use irpiv : H. 924 : G. 
 1471, 2: B. 627: Go. 644. 8 H. 1024: G. 1496: B. 549, 2: Go. 579, a. 
 9 The direct form was, I will not stop until you obey me. 
 
74 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART II 
 
 3. He arrives with the men from Miletus. 
 
 4. Cyrus thought that he would proceed to the king 1 as 
 
 quickly as he could. 
 
 177. Sec. 5-8. 
 
 1. Starting 2 from the city, he crossed this river. 
 
 2. Whenever we wish to hunt, we go into the park. 
 
 3. Therefore he marched through the middle 3 of Phrygia 
 
 five days' journey. 
 
 4. Xerxes was said to have been conquered 4 and to have 
 
 retreated from Greece. 
 
 178. Sec. 9-12. 
 
 1. Cyrus remained for five days at a river which was 6 
 
 twenty feet 6 wide. 7 
 
 2. He is evidently troubled because the men ask for 
 
 pay. 
 
 3. Cyrus paid a large amount of money to his army at 
 
 that time. 
 
 4. After he had made a review, a woman came. 
 
 179. Sec. 13-17. 
 
 1. The Cilician woman requested Cyrus 8 to review his army. 
 
 2. Cyrus wishes each general to draw up his own men. 
 
 1 to the king: H. 722, a : G. 1220, 8 : B. 418. 2 This use of the Present 
 Participle in English must not be imitated in Greek; use the Aorist, because 
 he started before he crossed the river. 8 Predicate position: H. 671: G. 
 978: B. 454: Go. 556. 4 to have been conquered : use the participle. Where 
 English uses two coordinate verbs with the same subject, Greek generally uses 
 a participle and a verb. 5 which was : use the participle. 6 H. 729, d : 
 G. 1094, 5 : B. 352. 7 = in width : the Accusative of specification. 8 8&o 
 takes the Genitive. 
 
ANABASIS BOOK I, CHAP. II 75 
 
 3. He will review the Greeks in his chariot as they 
 
 march by. 
 
 4. There the Greeks halted l and presented arms. 
 
 180. Sec. 18-21. 
 
 1. The Cilician woman was pleased when she saw the 
 
 Greeks going to their tents. 
 
 2. He handed her over to them to be sent 2 off by the 
 
 quickest way. 3 
 
 3. On the next day a messenger said that Cyrus had 
 
 killed a man. 
 
 4. He perceives that they will go 4 upon the moun- 
 
 tains. 
 
 181. Sec. 22-27. 
 
 1. When he had marched into this plain, he arrived at a 
 
 city called Tarsus. 5 
 
 2. These said that they had perished because 6 they could 
 
 not find the road. 
 
 3. He said that his wife wished to persuade 7 him. 
 
 4. If we ever happen upon any gifts, we will 8 take 
 
 them. 
 
 1 The verb is intransitive here. Consult the vocabulary and learn what 
 forms of toTT||u are transitive and what intransitive. 2 Does the Infinitive 
 express purpose in Greek? in Latin? in English? 8 An adverbial Accusa- 
 tive. * that they will go: H. 982: G. 1588 : B. 66 1 : Go. 586. 5 called 
 Tarsus : compare KvSvos ovopa, sec. 23. 6 because . . .find: does the par- 
 ticiple express cause ? 7 ircCOo) takes the accusative when it means persuade 
 and the Dative when it means obey. 8 Wherein is the difference in the Greek 
 form of expression between a vivid future and a present general condition ? 
 
76 
 
 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART II 
 
 REVIEW OF CHAPTERS I AND II 
 
 182. Learn the meaning of the following words. They 
 are all very important, and have occurred in Chapters I 
 and II. Memorize the principal parts of the verbs, and, 
 where indicated, notice the difference between the active 
 and middle meanings. 
 
 i. al<r0dvo|i<H 1 8. 8t>vajus 35. 
 
 IXms 36. 
 
 dirOKTlVG> 
 
 cnroSiSa>|JLi 
 
 d<j>ncv0}iai 
 dvapaivco 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 4. 
 
 5. 
 
 6. 
 
 7. 
 
 8. 
 
 9. 
 
 10. Siapaivco 
 n. Karapaivco 
 
 12. 
 
 13. 
 
 14. 
 
 15. 
 
 1 6. yvvr\ 
 
 1 7. 8\iva|Aai 
 
 IGcXco 
 
 19. 
 
 20. 
 21. 
 
 22. 
 
 23. if8ai|i(ov 
 
 24. 
 
 25. 
 
 26. 
 
 27. Ka6urrr|[u 
 
 28. 
 
 29. 
 
 30. 
 
 32. 
 33- 
 34- 
 
 iraxia) (act. and 
 mid.) 
 
 XavOdvo) 
 
 irais 
 
 37. 
 
 38. 
 
 39. 
 4O. 
 4 1 . 
 
 42. 
 
 43. 
 44. 
 
 45. 
 46. 
 
 47. 
 
 48. 
 49. 
 
 5O. 
 
 TTOVS 
 TTplV 
 
 raTTco 
 
 183. Review carefully the following points of syntax : 
 
 1. The participle with TVYX&VOD and XavOdvo. [H. 984: 
 
 G. 1586: B.66o, n.: Go. 585, a.~] 
 
 2. The construction used after ^ju, Xc^yo), and ctirov. 
 
 [H.94M: G. 1523: B.66 9 : Go. 658.] 
 
 3. The principle governing tenses in indirect discourse. 
 
 [H. 932, 2: G. 1487, 1494: B. 670: Go. 659.] 
 
 4. 4m with the Dative. See any lexicon. 
 
ANABASIS BOOK I, CHAPS. I-II 77 
 
 5. Various meanings of the participle. [H. 969: G. 1563: 
 
 B. 653, 1-8: 60.583.] 
 
 6. Result clauses. [H. 927, 910: G. 1449, 1450, 1445: B. 595, 
 
 597 : Go. 566, b, 619, 639, a.~] 
 
 7. OTI or <bs and the superlative. [H. 651 : B. 428.] 
 
 8. Purpose clauses. [H. 881, 911, 951, 969, c\ G. 1365, 1532, 
 
 1442, 1563,4: B. 590-592, 653, 5 : Go. 565, a, 615, 636, 638, 642.] 
 
 9. Position of irds, |i<n>s, and OVTOS. [11.671,672,673: 
 G. 974, 978, 979: B. 454, 456: Go. 455, 553.] 
 
 10. Verbs that are followed by the participle in indirect 
 discourse. [H. 981, 982: G. 1588: B. 661 : Go. 586.] 
 
 11. When avrds means the same. [H. 679: G. 989, 2: B. 
 
 475 : Go. 199.] 
 
 12. Verbs that are followed by the Infinitive in indirect 
 discourse. [H. 946: G. 1522: B. 669: Go. 658.] 
 
 13. Case governed by iro\|JLa> and 8o>. See lexicon. 
 
 14. Verbs governing two Accusatives. [11.724: 0.1069: 
 B. 340: Go. 534, 535.] 
 
 15. Construction following irpiv, until. [11.924: 0.1471, 
 
 2 : B. 627 : Go. 644.] 
 
 1 6. The negative used after verbs of Hoping, Promising, 
 and Swearing. [H. 1024: G. 1496: B. 549, 2: Go. 579, a.~] 
 
 17. Duration of time. [H. 720: G. 1062: B. 338: Go. 538.] 
 
 1 8. Genitive of measure. [H. 729, d\ G. 1094, 5: B. 352: 
 
 Go. 506.] 
 
 19. Present general conditions. [H. 894, i: G. 1393, i: B. 
 
 609 : Go. 650.] 
 
 20. Vivid future conditions. [H. 898: G. 1403: B. 604: Go. 
 650.] 
 
 21. SfjXos l[u used personally. [H. 981: G. 1589: 6.634.] 
 
 22. Accusative of specification. [H. 718: 0.1058: 6.337: 
 Go. 537.] 
 
 23. Verbs governing the Dative. [H. 764,2: G. 1160: B, 
 
 376: Go. 520, a.~\ 
 
78 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART II 
 
 184. Let the instructor form several sentences, employ- 
 ing the words in 182 and involving the constructions in 
 183. These sentences should be written by the students 
 at sight. 
 
 BOOK I CHAPTER III 
 
 185. Sec. 1-4. 
 
 1. I suspect 1 that the Greeks are not hired for this. 
 
 2. He was surprised when he saw that his soldiers were 
 
 stoning him. 2 
 
 3. Do not 3 wonder, Cyrus, that I take the darics. 
 
 4. I waged war against them that I might deprive the 
 
 Greeks of their land. 4 
 
 186. Sec. 5-8. 
 
 1. No one says that I betrayed Cyrus and chose 6 the bar- 
 
 barians. 
 
 2. I will suffer 6 whatever I must do. 
 
 3. I think that 7 if I should be deprived of you I should 
 
 not be in honor. 
 
 4. Cyrus, because he is troubled, 8 will send for Clearchus. 
 
 187. Sec. 9-13. 
 
 1. If we do not follow Cyrus, he will not be our paymaster. 
 
 2. He feared that he would not inflict punishment 9 on them. 
 
 1 Is to suspect a verb of thinking ? 2 H. 683, a, 685 : G. 993, 987 : B. 
 470, 471 : Go. 200. 3 What is the difference between the use of JXTJ with the 
 Present Imperative and JJITJ with the Aorist Subjunctive ? H. 874: G. 1346: 
 B. 584: Go. 485. 4 H. 724: G. 1069: B. 340: Go. 535. 5 betrayed and 
 chose = having betrayed, chose. Which tense of the participle ? 6 H. 916: 
 G. 1434: B. 620: Go. 616. 7 Which part of a condition is the main clause ? 
 8 because he is troubled: use the participle. 9 inflict punishment: 
 with Dative. H. 887: G. 1378. 
 
ANABASIS BOOK I, CHAP. IV 79 
 
 3. We must consider l how we shall be 2 valuable friends. 
 
 4. When he had said this, he showed what the difficulty 
 
 was. 3 
 
 188. Sec. 14-17. 
 
 1. If he does not give us these, we shall send men to seize 
 
 the heights. 
 
 2. Let us take the property before 4 Cyrus does. 
 
 3. I shall not obey whatever man you know. 
 
 4. We should hesitate 5 to follow whatever guide you 
 
 would wish to choose. 6 
 
 189. Sec. 18-21. 
 
 1. If we follow 7 as friends, we shall not use the mercena- 
 
 ries. 
 
 2. I think it best to march inland with Cyrus. 
 
 3. We replied that Abrocomas was 8 our enemy, and 8 was 
 
 distant from the river. 9 
 
 4. Cyrus promised that he would give each soldier a daric. 
 
 BOOK I CHAPTER IV 
 
 190. Sec. 1-4. 
 
 i. They march one day's journey, amounting to six para- 
 sangs, to the last city of Cilicia. 
 
 1 must consider : use the verbal in T^OS. 2 how . . . be : H. 885 : G. 1372 : 
 B. 593 : Go. 638, a. 3 What was the tense used in the direct question ? 
 4 Use <|>edva). See H. 984 : G. 1586 : B. 660, note : Go. 585, a. 5 What are 
 the two meanings of OKVC'CO ? See the vocabulary. 6 How does cupcoo differ 
 in meaning in the active and middle voices ? 7 If we follow : does the parti- 
 ciple ever take the place of the protasis ? H. 969, d : G. 1563, 5 : B. 653, 6: 
 Go. 583. 8 Omit. 9 Genitive of separation. 
 
80 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART II 
 
 2. He will command 1 them from Ephesus. 
 
 3. He was said to be occupying these 2 walls. 
 
 4. It was not possible 3 to pass through the middle of the 
 
 road. 
 
 191. Sec. 5-8. 
 
 1. We thought that Cyrus would send for the ships. 
 
 2. Cyrus remained there five days, and allowed them to 
 
 sail off. 
 
 3. Let him understand 4 that he will be caught. 
 
 4. I know that he will rob them of their wives. 6 
 
 192. Sec. 9-12. 
 
 1. They encamped at 6 a river which was thirty feet wide. 
 
 2. Belesys, the former king 7 of Syria, had a palace. 
 
 3. The soldiers said that they would follow Cyrus. 
 
 4. Although he knew this, he marched inland with 8 Cyrus. 
 
 193. Sec. 13-15. 
 
 1. They promised that they would follow Cyrus until he 
 
 collected 9 his army. 
 
 2. He said this before 10 they were persuaded. 
 
 3. They ought 11 to cross the river. 
 
 4. If we go away, he will use us for whatever he wishes. 
 
 1 H. 741: G. 1109: B. 356: Go. 510. cryw is an exception to this rule. 
 2 Predicate position. *. clpC in the third person singular often means it is 
 possible. 4 The third person of the Imperative is used in exhortations. In 
 exhortations of the first person, the Subjunctive is used. 6 H. 724 : G. 1069 : 
 B. 340 : Go. 535. 6 Study all the meanings of 4irC, as given in the vocabulary. 
 7 the former king the one having ruled : use the Aorist participle. 8 H. 801, 
 806: G. 1 21 2, I, by 1217. 9 The direct discourse was we will follow Cyrus 
 until he collects. H. 920-922: G. 1463-5: B. 626: Go. 631. 10 irpCv, 
 meaning before, takes the Infinitive. n ought is expressed by 8ci or XPH and 
 the Accusative and Infinitive. 
 
ANABASIS BOOK I, CHAPS. III-IV 
 
 8l 
 
 194. Sec. 16-19. 
 
 1. We shall take care 1 that 2 you hear this. 
 
 2. They prayed that the whole 3 army might follow 
 
 3. He went ahead that. he might burn these boats. 
 
 4. The villages in which they remained were full of food. 
 
 17. 
 
 1 8. Trcuvea> 
 19. em 
 20. 
 
 REVIEW OF CHAPTERS III AND IV 
 
 195. Learn the meanings of the following important 
 words which occur in Chapters III and IV. Memorize 
 the principal parts of the verbs, and, where indicated, 
 notice the difference between the active and middle mean- 
 ings. 
 
 1. dSlK0> 
 
 2. agios 
 
 3. CLTTOKpLVOfiai 
 
 4. diroirXcco 
 
 5- 
 
 6. 
 
 7. pdXXo> 
 
 8. 
 
 9- 
 10. <|>op<o (act. and mid.) 
 
 I I . OKVCl) 
 
 12. Siapards 
 
 13. SICOKCD 
 
 14. 8o> (act. and mid } 
 
 15. VKd 
 
 1 6. 6VT10T] (U 
 
 1 We shall take care = Tt will be a care to us. 2 H. 885 : G. 1372 : B. 593 : 
 Go. 638, a. 3 Predicate position. 4 Refers to the subject of the verb prayed 
 
 GK. PROSE COMP. 6 
 
 21. 
 22. 
 
 23- 
 24. 
 
 25. |iVTOl 
 
 26. |1TJV 
 
 27. otfiai 
 
 28. oixojia 
 
 29. opdo) 
 
 30. 6p|idca 
 
 31. 6p|I0) 
 
 32. 
 
82 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART II 
 
 33. imGo 39. oTv6s 45. <{>aiva> (act. and mid.) 
 
 34. mords 40. Tix<>s 46. <j>avp6s 
 
 35. irpa/yiia 41. Tifidco 47. <|>8dva> 
 
 36. -Trpo6iSco|H 42. irpoTi|ida) 48. \PGLO\LCLI 
 
 37. (TITOS 43. Ti[ic0pa> 49. \f/\i8(o (act. and mid.) 
 
 38. o-K-qvcco 44. inro\|;ia 50. <b<J>Xa> 
 
 196. Review 183 and the following points of syntax : 
 
 1. Reflexive pronouns. [11.683,0,685: 0.993,987: 6.470, 
 471 : Go. 200.] 
 
 2. Tenses in indirect discourse. [H. 853-855: G. 1483: B. 
 670: Go. 659.] 
 
 3. Prohibitions. [H. 874: G. 1346: B. 584: Go. 485.] 
 
 4. Verbs taking two Accusatives. [H. 724 : G. 1069 : B. 
 340: Go. 534, 0, 535.] 
 
 5. Vivid future relative conditions. [H. 916: G. 1434: B. 
 
 621-625 : Go. 616, 617.] 
 
 6. Moods after verbs of Fearing. [H. 887 : G. 1378 : B. 594 : 
 Go. 6 10, 6u.] 
 
 7. Construction used with (j>6dvco. [H. 984: G. 1586: B. 660, 
 
 n. : Go. 585, #.] 
 
 8. Use of the participle for the protasis of a condition. 
 
 [H. 969, di G. 1563, 5: B. 653, 6: Go. 583.] 
 
 9. The use of the third person of the Imperative. 
 
 10. (JL6TCL with the Genitive. 
 
 11. Until and before. Sec. 122-129. 
 
 12. Ways of expressing ought. 
 
 13. OTTCOS and the Future Indicative. [H. 885: G. 1372: B. 
 
 593 : Go. 638, a.] 
 
 14. Position of the demonstrative pronouns. [H. 673: G. 
 
 974: 6.456: Go. 553.] 
 
 197. Let the instructor form several sentences, employ- 
 ing the words in 195 and involving the constructions in 
 196. These sentences should be written by the students 
 at sight 
 
ANABASIS BOOK I, CHAP. V 83 
 
 BOOK I CHAPTER V 
 
 198. Sec. 1-4. 
 
 1. In this plain were ostriches of all kinds. 
 
 2. Whenever they ran forward, the horsemen did the 
 
 same. 1 
 
 3. It is possible to use the wings. 
 
 4. Whenever the horsemen pursue 2 them, they quickly 
 
 stop. 3 
 
 199. Sec. 5-8. 
 
 1. All the inhabitants used to live 4 by making 5 millstones. 
 
 2. Since they could not buy grain, they ate flesh. 
 
 3. On one occasion 6 Cyrus thought that they worked 
 
 slowly. 
 
 4. Some, wearing 7 tunics, ran into the mud. 
 
 200. Sec. 9-1 1. 
 
 1. Cyrus clearly 8 thought that he 9 would fight the king. 
 
 2. One could see 10 that the kingdom was weak in its 
 
 forces. 
 
 3. They crossed the river in such a way that the water 
 
 did not touch u them. 
 
 4. While Clearchus was inflicting 12 blows, the soldiers 
 
 were angry. 
 
 1 avrds following the article. 2 Whenever . . . pursue : a present general 
 condition. 3 How does iravw differ in meaning in the active and middle 
 voices? 4 used to live : what tense denotes customary action? 5 Use the 
 participle. 6 On one occasion: use ITOT& 7 \o>. 8 H. 981 : G. 1589: 
 B. 634. 9 The subject of the Infinitive in indirect discourse is omitted when 
 it is the same as that of the main verb. 10 One could see = It was possible to 
 see. n in such a way . . . touch: a result clause. 12 while . . . inflicting : 
 use the Genitive absolute. 
 
84 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART II 
 
 201. Sec. 12-17. 
 
 1. On the same day one of the soldiers came to split 1 
 
 wood. 
 
 2. The Thracians were 2 thoroughly frightened, and ran to 
 
 their own army. 
 
 3. Proxenus chanced to speak lightly of their 3 suffering. 
 
 4. Consider that the barbarians will be more hostile to us 
 
 than the enemy are. 
 
 BOOK I CHAPTER VI 
 
 202. Sec. 1-4. 
 
 1. He said that if 4 he should seize the horsemen he 
 
 would plot against Cyrus. 
 
 2. We prevented them from seeing 5 the king. 
 
 3. They thought that a trusty man had this letter. 
 
 4. Cyrus arrested 6 Orontas and called together the Per- 
 
 sians. 
 
 203. Sec. 5-7. 
 
 1. It is right to council with you about Orontas. 
 
 2. Afterwards I brought 7 it about that he gave me pledges. 
 
 3. Did 8 you not come to the altar and acknowledge 
 
 this? 
 
 4. I said that they repented. 9 
 
 1 Review all the ways of expressing purpose. 2 were thoroughly frightened 
 and ran being thoroughly frightened, ran. 3 avrwv in the predicate 
 position. A possessive Genitive of a reflexive pronoun takes the attributive 
 position. 4 if. . . Cyrus : first write out the condition as it was in direct dis- 
 course. 6 from seeing: for the various forms of expression, see H. 963 : G. 
 1549 : B. 643 : Go. 572, 573. arrested and called = having arrested, called : 
 use the Aorist participle. 7 Cf. liroi)<ra <TT Sogcu. 8 H. 1015 : G. 1603 : B. 
 572 : Go. 668. 9 pLCTa^cXci is an impersonal verb, and takes the Dative case. 
 
ANABASIS BOOK I, CHAPS. V-VI 85 
 
 204. Sec. 8-1 1. 
 
 1. If I should not do wrong, you would not be a friend to 
 
 me. 
 
 2. I have leisure to benefit l my friends. 
 
 3. At the command of 2 Cyrus, they led him to death. 
 
 4. They conjectured 3 that he had died. 
 
 14. 
 15. 
 1 6. 
 
 REVIEW OF CHAPTERS V AND VI 
 
 205. Learn the meaning of the following important 
 words which occur in Chapters V and VI. Memorize the 
 principal parts of the verbs, and, where indicated, notice 
 the difference between the active and middle meanings. 
 
 17. ui|ii (act. and mid.) 
 
 1 8. unriis 
 
 19. t<r)(vpcos 
 
 20. KdTdKCUVa) 
 
 21. Kdco 
 
 22. KdTaKdeo 
 
 23. irpoKaraKaco 
 
 24. Kpavyrj 
 
 25. Kpivco 
 
 26. KcoXvco 
 
 27. vofis 
 
 28. op-yi^ofiat 
 
 29. ow 
 
 30. iravToios 
 3i- 
 
 2. 
 
 3. d(T0VTJS 
 
 4. euro/yco 
 5. 
 
 6. 
 
 7- 
 
 8. 8id 
 
 9. Siarpipco 
 
 10. o-8ia> 
 
 11. TOl|iOS 
 
 12. 
 
 32. 
 
 TT0160) 
 
 1 Use v iroic'w with the Accusative. 2 At the command of ': use the parti- 
 ciple. Is the Genitive absolute permissible? 3 This is a verb of thinking. 
 
86 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART II 
 
 33. KCUC&S TTOl0> 42. TpX 
 
 34. TTOT4 43. irpOTpXO) 
 
 35. irpdTTCD 44. v8o>p 
 
 36. irpOl|U 45. WTpOS 
 
 37. iri)v8dvo|xa 46. 
 
 38. crxoXii 47. 
 
 39. axoXatos 48. 
 
 40. axoXaicos 49. a>V0|iai 
 
 41. rax^ 50. (0<j>\i[ios 
 
 206. Review the following points of syntax : 
 
 1. Present and past general conditions. [H. 894, 914,6.: 
 G. 1393* ! 2 HS 1 * ! 2: B - 69> 6lO: Go - 6 5> 651, (2).] 
 
 2. Verbs which take the participle in indirect discourse. 
 
 [H. 981, 982: G. 1588: B. 661 : Go. 586.] 
 
 3. Result clauses. [H. 927: G. 1449, 1450: B. 595, 597: Go. 566, 
 
 ,619, 639, a.~] 
 
 4. Genitive absolute. [11.970: G. 1568: 6.657: Go. 590.] 
 
 5. Construction after verbs of Preventing. [H. 963: G. 
 
 1549: B. 643: Go. 572, 573.] 
 
 6. Interrogative particles. [H. 1015 : G. 1603 : B. 572 : Go. 668.] 
 
 207. Let the instructor form several sentences, employ- 
 ing the words in 205 and involving the constructions in 
 206. These sentences should be written by the students 
 at sight. 
 
 BOOK I CHAPTER VII 
 
 208. Sec. 1-4. 
 
 1. On the following dawn, the king came to fight. 
 
 2. He planned how he would encourage 1 his men. 
 
 1 how . . . encourage : the direct question was how can I encourage / 
 [R.8 7 2: G. 1327: 6.577: Go. 471.] 
 
ANABASIS BOOK I, CHAP. VII 87 
 
 3. See to it that 1 you are braver than the barbarians. 
 
 4. I will make many choose 2 not to go home. 
 
 209. Sec. 5-9. 
 
 -. Some say that you do this because you are 3 in danger. 
 Z. I say that you can not 4 pay all 5 you wish. 
 
 3. I fear that he will not give 6 a golden crown to each 
 
 man. 
 
 4. What shall we have, if we go away ? 
 
 210. Sec. 10-15. 
 
 1. The number was said to be one hundred thousand. 7 
 
 2. They arrived seven days after the battle. 8 
 
 3. Deserters before the battle were captured by the enemy. 9 
 
 4. We thought that the king would fight at 10 the walls. 
 
 211. Sec. 16-20. 
 
 1. Cyrus learned that the king was marching forward and 
 
 was inside the ditches. 
 
 2. If the king does not fight within ten days, 11 I will give 
 
 you the money. 
 
 3. They promised that they would not 12 do this. 
 
 4. Cyrus thought 13 he would sit in his chariot. 
 
 1 See to it that: H. 886: G. 1352-3: B. 583, n. 3: Go. 638, b. 2 make 
 many choose : cf. iroXXovs iroiT|<riv . . . IX&rOai. 3 because you are : 8td 
 TO elvai. * that you can not: 4>T)(i is followed by the Accusative and 
 Infinitive; ctirov, and Xc'^co in the Active, by the ort or ws construction. 
 5 oo-a. 6 that . . .give: H. 887: G. 1378: B. 594: Go. 610 611. 7 What 
 is used in the text ? 8 seven . . . battle : cf. vorpr]<r rfjs H-oot 1 ! 5 vjUpats 
 TTVT. H. 781 : G. 1184: B. 388: Go. 526. 9 by the enemy : Genitive with 
 viro. 10 4irC : see the vocabulary for the proper case. n within ten days : 
 the Genitive expresses the time Within Which ; the Dative, the time When ; 
 and the Accusative, the time How Long. u H. 1024 : G. 1496 : B. 549, 2 : 
 Go. 579, a. 13 8oKo> with the Dative. 
 
88 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART II 
 
 BOOK I CHAPTER VIII 
 
 212. Sec. 1-7. 
 
 1. He intended to halt, when a man appeared, 1 riding at 
 
 full speed. 
 
 2. They thought that the king would attack them. 2 
 
 3. After him, Proxenos occupied the left wing. 
 
 4. All except Cyrus did not have bare heads. 
 
 213. Sec. 8-12. 
 
 1. And then the whole army came into view. 
 
 2. In the afternoon, the enemy appeared. 
 
 3. They cut down whomever they came upon. 3 
 
 4. Cyrus was deceived, however, in what 4 he told the 
 
 Greeks. 
 
 214. Sec. 13-17. 
 
 1. Although he saw 5 that the king occupied the center, 
 
 he did not do this. 
 
 2. I will take care 6 that we are not surrounded. 
 
 3. We asked him if the omens were favorable. 7 
 
 4. When he heard 8 the watchword passing through the 
 
 ranks, he said, " Well, 9 let it be this." 
 
 215. Sec. 18-22. 
 
 i. Everybody shouted, so as to frighten 10 the horses. 
 
 1 Note the difference of meaning in the active and middle. 2 An indirect 
 reflexive. H. 683, a, 685 : G. 993, 987 : B. 472 : Go. 200. 3 whomever . . . 
 upon: past general condition. For the case, see H. 775: G. 1179: B. 394. 
 4 Accusative of specification. 6 Although he saw : the participle may denote 
 concession. 6 / will take care = it will be a care to me. 7 The direct 
 question was Are the omens favorable ? 8 H. 742: G. 1102: B. 356 : Go. 
 -510, 511. 9 d\Xd. 10 irWw $6fiov and Dative. 
 
ANABASIS BOOK I, CHAPS. VII-VIII 89 
 
 2. Whenever the chariots rushed through the Greeks, no 
 
 one suffered any harm. 1 
 
 3. Cyrus knew that the Greeks were 2 victorious over those 
 
 opposite them. 
 
 4. They thought they 3 would perceive this. 
 
 216. Sec. 23-29. 
 
 1. Cyrus feared that the barbarians would march to meet 
 
 him. 4 
 
 2. When he saw the king, Cyrus could not restrain him- 
 
 self. 
 
 3. Ktesias, the surgeon, will tell you how many 5 were 
 
 killed. 6 
 
 4. He is said to have fallen from his horse. 
 
 REVIEW OF CHAPTERS VII AND VIII 
 
 217. Learn the meaning of the following important words 
 which occur in Chapters VII and VIII. Memorize the prin- 
 cipal parts of the verbs, and, where indicated, notice the 
 difference between the active and middle meanings. 
 
 1. alo-xiivco (act. and mid.) 7. pdOos 
 
 2. dvrios 8. pa6vs 
 
 3. cnroOvfjo-Kco 9. podco 
 
 4. cipfia 10. 86pv 
 
 5. aurojioXc'co II. eyyvs 
 
 6. a-uTOjioXos 12. 
 
 1 any harm : ovSev. Do two negatives in Greek make an affirmative ? 
 2 H. 981, 982: G. 1588: B. 661 : Go. 586. 3 May this be omitted ? 4 to 
 meet him : dvrios. 5 how many : oirocroi. 6 diro0vT)<rKa> is often used as 
 the passive 
 
90 
 
 GREEK 
 
 PROSE COMPOSITION - 
 
 -PART II 
 
 13- 
 
 CKCUTTOS 
 
 26. 
 
 0CO 
 
 38. 
 
 6m<r6v 
 
 14. 
 
 KdTpO)0V 
 
 27. 
 
 06pupos 
 
 39- 
 
 iraia) 
 
 IS- 
 
 KaTpCOC7 
 
 28. 
 
 Uavds 
 
 40. 
 
 irdpoSos 
 
 1 6. 
 
 KctTpos 
 
 29. 
 
 KaTa<f>avfjs 
 
 41. 
 
 TTpnrnr 
 
 17. 
 
 \l)6pia 
 
 30. 
 
 K(j>aXTJ 
 
 42. 
 
 miTTCi) 
 
 18. 
 
 [rrrpoo-0V 
 
 31- 
 
 Kparcco 
 
 43- 
 
 irXriv 
 
 19. 
 
 cvTv-yx&Vtt 
 
 32. 
 
 Krdofiai 
 
 44. 
 
 o-irovSTJ 
 
 20. 
 
 ImmirrcD 
 
 33- 
 
 |ii|ivfjorK(o (act. 
 
 45- 
 
 TO|LS 
 
 21. 
 
 cpcordco 
 
 
 and mid.) 
 
 46. 
 
 TCL(j>p09 
 
 22. 
 
 TL 
 
 34- 
 
 VIKCUO 
 
 47- 
 
 T6|\)|ia 
 
 23. 
 
 cvpos 
 
 35. 
 
 ofcaSe 
 
 48. 
 
 TO|1JO) 
 
 24. 
 
 TJK(0 
 
 36. 
 
 OLKOL 
 
 49- 
 
 inro^Yt 
 
 25. 
 
 T|VlKa 
 
 37- 
 
 6}XCOS 
 
 50. 
 
 XPTI^ 
 
 218. Review the following points of syntax : 
 
 1. Potential Optative. [H. 872: G. 1327: B. 563: Go. 480.] 
 
 2. STTCOS with the Future Indicative in Commands. [H. 
 886: G. 1352-1353: B. 583,11. 3: Go. 638,^.] 
 
 3. Construction after <t>tiju, etirov, and Xeyco. [H. 946, b\ 
 G. 1523: B. 669: Go. 658.] 
 
 4. Construction after verbs of Fearing. [H. 887: G. 1378: 
 B. 594: Go. 610, 6 1 1.] 
 
 5. \nr6 and the Genitive [H. 808, i, b\ G. 1219, .] 
 
 6. How is time Within Which expressed ? time When ? 
 time How Long? [H. 759, 782, 720: G. 1136, 1192, 1062: B. 338, 
 359,385: Go. 538, 515, 527, c.-] 
 
 7. What verbs take |i/rj and the Infinitive ? [H. 1024 : G. 
 1496: B. 549, 2: Go. 579, a.'] 
 
 8. Indirect reflexives. [H. 683, a, 685: G. 993, 987: B. 472: 
 Go. 200.] 
 
 9. Compound verbs which take the Dative. [H. 775 : G. 
 1179: B. 394.] 
 
 10. The Accusative of specification. [H. 718: G. 1058: B. 
 337: Go. 537.] 
 
ANABASIS BOOK I, CHAP. IX 91 
 
 11. Various meanings of the participle. [H. 969, a-e\ G. 
 
 1563, 1-8: B. 653, 1-8: Go. 583.] 
 
 12. Verbs followed by the Genitive. [H. 742: G. 1102: B. 
 
 356: Go. 510, 511.] 
 
 13. Indirect Questions. [H. 932, i and 2: G. 1479, 1481 : B. 
 
 673 : Go. 66l.] 
 
 219. Let the instructor form several sentences, em- 
 ploying the words in 217 and involving the construc- 
 tions in 218. These sentences should be written by 
 the students at sight. 
 
 BOOK I CHAPTER IX 
 
 220. Sec. 1-6. 
 
 1. Cyrus was acknowledged to be worthy 1 to rule. 
 
 2. When he was a boy, he was the best of all in every 
 
 respect. 2 
 
 3. One 3 could learn 4 how to rule and to be ruled. 
 
 4. Once a bear rushed upon Cyrus and dragged him off 
 
 his horse. 
 
 221. Sec. 7-13. 
 
 1. If he ever promised 5 anybody 6 anything, he considered 
 
 it of the greatest importance 7 not to prove false. 
 
 2. Therefore all the cities feared Tissaphernes and chose 
 
 Cyrus. 
 
 1 H. 952: G. 1526: B. 641: Go. 565, #. 2 Accusative of specification. 
 3 rls. 4 could learn : H. 872: G. 1327 : B. 563 : Go. 480. |iav0dvci> followed 
 by the participle means / learn that, etc.; by the Infinitive, / learn how to, 
 etc. 5 If . . . promised : this is a past general condition. Review 106-111, 
 113-115. 6 Dative of indirect object. 1 considered . . . importance : irepl 
 irXctcrrov iroie'w. 
 
92 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART II 
 
 3. He prayed to live 1 until he should overcome the men 
 
 who did him harm. 
 
 4. He allowed rascals 2 to be deprived of their hands. 
 
 222. Sec. 14-19. 
 
 1. Brave men, however, 3 he used to honor. 
 
 2. Wherever 4 any one thought Cyrus would notice him, 
 
 he evidently 5 wished to incur danger. 
 
 3. He employed 6 just generals. 
 
 4. If he ever saw that a man was just, he gave him more. 
 
 223. Sec. 20-26. 
 
 1. Cyrus thought that his friends needed 7 as 8 many things 
 
 as they saw. 
 
 2. They say that many sent 9 him gifts. 
 
 3. He used to surpass his friends in thoughtfulness. 
 
 4. The bearer said that Cyrus wished 10 you to take a 
 
 taste 11 of these. 
 
 224. Sec. 27-31. 
 
 1. He procured fodder on account of having 12 many 
 
 friends. 
 
 2. If many were ever 13 likely to see him, he honored his 
 
 friends. 
 
 3. Cyrus thought that this man was faithful to him. 14 
 
 4. After his death, 15 Ariaeus fled. 
 
 1 See 122, 123, 124. 2 icaKovp-yos. 8 -y ^VTOI. 4 Sirov. This is a past 
 general condition. 6 Use SfjXos or <|>avep6s lju ; H. 981 : G. 1589: B. 634. 
 6 xpa-o^cii. What case follows it ? 7 Seo^xai takes the Genitive. 8 as many 
 as: ocros. 9 In all indirect discourse constructions he sure to find the tense 
 of the direct statement. Here the direct form was many sent. 10 The direct 
 form was wishes. n take a taste : Aorist. ^ on . . . having : 8td r6 and In- 
 finitive. 13 H. 846: G. 1254: B. 533: Go. 570, b. 14 This refers to Cyrus. 
 What kind of a reflexive pronoun is it ? 16 After his death : Genitive absolute. 
 
ANABASIS BOOK I, CHAP. X 93 
 
 BOOK I CHAPTER X 
 
 225. Sec. 1-6. 
 
 1. The king with his men fled through his own 1 camp. 
 
 2. The king pursued them as if he was victorious in every 
 
 way. 
 
 3. Tissaphernes planned whether he should go 2 ahead in 
 
 pursuit or collect his own men. 
 
 4. He was evidently making preparations. 
 
 226. Sec. 7-12. 
 
 1. The Greeks struck Tissaphernes' men as they charged 
 
 through. 
 
 2. The king is afraid that the Greeks will put 3 the river 
 
 in their rear. 4 
 
 3. The king then 5 also 6 saw that the Greeks were chang- 
 
 ing into the same formation. 
 
 4. So that the Greeks did not know what would take place. 7 
 
 227. Sec. 13-19. 
 
 1. He halted 8 his army and saw that they were fleeing. 
 
 2. He rode ahead to seize 9 some point. 10 
 
 3. They prepared this wine that they might distribute it 
 
 among their friends. 11 
 
 4. It was night before the king appeared. 12 
 
 1 his own : the possessive Genitive of the reflexive pronouns is put regularly 
 in the attribute position. 2 whither . . .go : the direct question was a dubitative 
 Subjunctive, Shall I go ? 3 that... put: H. 887: G. 1378: B. 594: Go. 610, 
 611. 4 put . . . rear : cf. iroi/qVao-Oai ftrurOcv TOV iroTafxov. 6 Srf. 6 KCU 
 placed before the word it emphasizes. 7 what . . . place : what tense of the 
 participle ? 8 Consult the lexicon to see what forms of lo-r-qui are transitive 
 and what intransitive. 9 to seize : how many ways are there of expressing this 
 idea? 10 some point: rl. n Dative. 12 irpCv, meaning before ', takes the In- 
 finitive. See 125, 126, 127. 
 
94 
 
 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART II 
 
 REVIEW OF CHAPTERS IX AND X 
 
 228. Learn the following important words which occur 
 in Chapters IX and X. Memorize the principal parts 
 of the verbs, and, where indicated, notice the difference 
 between the active and middle meanings. 
 
 1. atpc'co (act and mid.) 
 
 2. alcrxpds 
 
 3. apicrrov 
 
 4. dvdpi<7TOS 
 
 5. dvcnravo) (act. and mid.) 
 
 6. av9is 
 7. 
 
 8. 
 
 9. 0'X<0 
 
 10. ytva> (act. and mid.) 
 
 11. SiaStSa>|u 
 
 12. 
 13. 
 
 14. 8oi)Xos 
 
 15. v6a 
 
 1 6. 1TlTa 
 I /. 6WOVS 
 
 1 8. 
 
 19. 
 
 20. 
 21. 
 
 22. KaraKdirrco 
 
 23. KplVCO 
 
 24. KpSoS 
 
 25. Kp8a\os 
 
 26. 
 
 27. X6<j)os 
 
 28. 
 
 29. 
 
 30. 
 
 31. irais 
 
 32. 
 
 33. 
 
 34. ircipdco 
 
 35. irXo\)T(D 
 
 36. irXowtos 
 
 37. irXii<rios 
 
 38. irords 
 
 39. TToXXaxis 
 40. 
 
 41. 
 
 42. CTKOTTCO) 
 
 43. (nrcvSco (act. and mid.) 
 
 44. <nrov8ii 
 
 45. <TTpO|I(U 
 
 46. 
 
 47. 0-4^0) 
 
 48. ox|>6Spa 
 49. 
 
 50. 
 
ANABASIS BOOK II, CHAP. I 95 
 
 229. Review the following points of syntax : 
 
 1. Infinitive with adjectives. [H. 952: 0.1526: 6.641: Go. 
 565, a.-] 
 
 2. Present and past general conditions. See 106-111. 
 
 3. Until and before. See 122-129. 
 
 4. 8fjX6s i[u and <|>avp6s t|u. [H. 981.- G. 1589: B. 634.] 
 
 5. What case follows 8o> ? 
 
 6. Use of the tenses in indirect discourse. [H. 853-855: 
 
 G. 1483 : B. 670 : Go. 659.] 
 
 /. Use of fJL\Xo>. [H. 846: G. 1254: B. 533: Go. 570, b.~\ 
 
 8. Construction after verbs of Fearing. [H. 887: G. 1378: 
 B. 594: Go. 610, 6 1 1.] 
 
 230. Let the instructor form several sentences, employ- 
 ing the words in 228 and involving the constructions in 229. 
 These sentences should be written by the students at sight. 
 
 BOOK II CHAPTER I 
 
 231. Sec. 1-4. 
 
 1. At daybreak they decided to pack up and join 1 Cyrus. 
 
 2. I will wait for you a day, 2 if you intend to come. 
 
 3. Would that Cyrus had not died. 3 
 
 4. If he had 4 come, we would have put him on the throne. 
 
 232. Sec. 5-9. 
 
 1. We provided food as best we could 5 by using the oxen. 
 
 2. One of them, as it happened, was acquainted with 
 
 tactics. 6 
 
 1 to pack up and join = having packed up, to join. 2 What kind of time is 
 expressed ? 3 Would . . . died : express this sentence in two ways. H. 870, 
 871, a: 0.1507,1511,1512: B. 588 : Go. 470. 4 H. 895 : G. 1397 : B. 606 : 
 Go. 649. 6 as best we could : cf. oirws ISvvaro (6). 6 Cf. TWV dji,<)>l 
 
96 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART II 
 
 3. They bade him surrender his arms and go to the king's 
 
 court 1 
 
 4. It is not the privilege of the conquered 2 to reply. 
 
 233. Sec. 10-13. 
 
 1. Why must 3 the king persuade us and not come and 
 
 take our arms ? 
 
 2. I think that you are mine, 4 because I have a multitude 
 
 of men. 
 
 3. Do not think, 5 soldiers, that we shall not use our valor. 
 
 4. Let them know, 6 however, that we are not foolish. 
 
 234. Sec. 14-18, 
 
 1. Some said that they had been and would be 7 valuable 8 
 
 friends. 
 
 2. He asked if you were 9 a Greek. 
 
 3. Advise us what you think 10 will bring you honor. 
 
 4. He will not surrender hi$ arms, in order that 11 you may 
 
 be more hopeful. 
 
 235. Sec. 19-23. 
 
 1. If you could be saved by fighting 12 the king, I should 
 
 advise you not to surrender your arms. 
 
 2. We shall be more valuable friends, if we have 13 our 
 
 arms. 
 
 1 Use Ovpa. 2 // . . . conquered '= it is of the conquered. 8 See 73 and 74. 
 * Use the possessive Genitive. 5 H. 874, a: G. 1346: B. 584: Go. 485. 
 6 Let them know : in exhortations of the third person, the Imperative is used ; 
 of the first person, the Subjunctive. 7 had been and would be : the direct dis- 
 course was have been and will be, etc. 8 iroXXoi) auu. 9 What was the direct 
 question? 10 what you think : & TI <roi SOKCI. n Review all the common 
 ways of expressing purpose. See 78 and 79. 12 Use the participle. 13 if we 
 have : the participle is often used to express the protasis of a condition. 
 
ANABASIS BOOK II, CHAP. II 97 
 
 3. Carry back word, therefore, that we must wage l war. 
 
 4. Phalinus replies, "If you remain, 2 there will be a truce; 
 
 and if you advance or retreat, war." 
 
 BOOK II CHAPTER II 
 
 236. Sec. 1-4. 
 
 1. Ariaeus then 3 said, "There are many Persians nobler 
 
 than I am." 4 
 
 2. If you do not 5 come, we shall go away early. 
 
 3. At sunset they would not be able to cross the Tigris 
 
 river without boats. 
 
 4. Whenever the signal is given, 6 follow me. 
 
 237. Sec. 5-io. 
 
 1. They obeyed him, because the others were inexpe- 
 
 rienced. 7 
 
 2. About midnight, they grounded arms 8 and came to- 
 
 gether. 
 
 3. The barbarians swore that they would not 9 betray the 
 
 Greeks. 
 
 4. Come now, 10 let us take the same 11 journey. 
 
 238. Sec. 11-15. 
 
 i. If you go away by the road 12 by which you came, you 
 will perish from hunger. 
 
 1 that . . . wage: H. 981 : G. 1588: B. 235, 663-666: Go. 352-354, 596. 
 2 If you remain : notice carefully the expression used in the text. 3 Brf. 
 4 Omit. 5 H. 1019, 1021 : G. 1383, I : B. 600: Go. 646. 6 Whenever . . . 
 given : what kind of a condition? signal is given : use oTjixaCvco impersonally. 
 7 because . . . inexperienced: use the Genitive absolute or a conjunction, such 
 as ore or erreC, and the Indicative. 8 ground arms : TiO-qjAL rd oirXa. 9 See 
 141. 10 Come now : a-yerc 8if. ll What position has avros when it means the 
 same ? 12 by the . . . came ; cf. TJV rjX.6o|j,v, H. 715, b : G. 1057 : B. 331 : Go. 536. 
 
 GK. PROSE COMP. 7 
 
98 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART II 
 
 2. You must J proceed through the country. 
 
 3. If we are once separated from the Persians, they will 
 
 not 2 be able to overtake us. 
 
 4. We were deceived in this, because smoke appeared. 3 
 
 239. Sec. 1 6-2 1. 
 
 1. At sunset, the very 4 wood of the houses will be carried 
 
 off by the king. 
 
 2. We made a great 5 noise by calling one another, so that 
 
 the enemy were terrified. 6 
 
 3. A panic, however, fell upon the Greeks also. 7 
 
 4. He said that whoever disclosed this would receive 8 a 
 
 talent. 
 
 REVIEW OF CHAPTERS I AND II 
 
 240. Learn the following important words which occur 
 in Chapters I and II. Memorize the principal parts of the 
 verbs, and, where indicated, notice the difference between 
 the active and middle meanings. 
 
 1. oxcov 8. 
 
 2. afxa 9. 5ih>o 
 
 3. avcryKaa> 10. 
 
 4. diraYY&Xa n. 
 
 5. dVX<0 12. CVpUTKCO 
 
 6. aircipos 13. 4|oTrXici> 
 
 7. potJS 14. d<0 
 
 1 See 74. 2 H. 1032 : G. 1360 : B. 569, 2 : Go. 489, a. 8 See the vocab- 
 ulary for the difference between the active and middle meaning of 4>cuvco. 
 
 * Review all the uses of avros : 46. 6 Use iroXvs. 6 So that . . . terrified: 
 
 is this a purpose or a result clause? 7 Ka, meaning a/so, precedes the word 
 it emphasizes. 8 whoever . . . receive : the direct statement was whoever dis- 
 closes this will receive. 
 
ANABASIS BOOK II, CHAPS. I-II 
 
 99 
 
 15. rjXios 
 
 1 6. 8vo> (act. and 28. 
 
 mid.) 
 
 1 7. KTJp-UTTCD 
 
 27. Ol6v T 
 
 4O. 0-T||iaLVCO 
 
 28. 0|1VU|U 
 
 41. <n>|ipo\)Xi 
 
 29. ovos 
 
 42. <ro>Ttipia 
 
 30. TrapaSiScojii 
 
 43. acoos 
 
 31. TTpl|lV(0 
 
 44. TlTpCOdKO) 
 
 32. TTOpl<0 
 
 45. TOIVW 
 
 33. irpOTpaios 
 
 46. ToX(xda> 
 
 34. wTpaios 
 
 47. <|>pO) 
 
 35. <n/yT| 
 
 48. <j>pOV0) 
 
 36. (TKOTOS 
 
 49. \|/ij8co 
 
 37. o-Koraios 
 
 50. XRT| 
 
 38. (TTOXOS 
 
 
 19. KaTao-K-qvdco 
 
 20. (TKT|VCD(ia 
 
 21. KaTaXa|J.pdvco 34. 
 
 22. KOTTTCO 
 
 23. Kpcas 
 
 24. 
 
 25. 
 
 26. |l<j)OS 39- 
 
 241. Review the following points of syntax : 
 
 1. Wishes. [H. 870, 871,0: G. 1507, 1511, 1512: B. 587, 588: Go. 
 470, 476.] 
 
 2. Contrary to fact conditions. [H. 895: G. 1397: B. 606: 
 
 Go. 649.] 
 
 3. Must and Ought. See 74 and 75. 
 
 4. Prohibitions. [H. 874, a\ G. 1346: B. 584: Go. 485.] 
 
 5. Purpose clauses. See 78 and 79. 
 
 6. Construction used after aYyeXXco. [H. 981: 0.1588: 
 
 B. 661 : Go. 586.] 
 
 7. The negative of the protasis. [H. 1019, 1021 : G. 1383, i : 
 
 B. 600 : Go. 646.] 
 
 8. Verbs followed by \LT\ and the Infinitive. See 141. 
 
 9. Uses of O/UTOS. See 46. 
 
 10. Cognate Accusative. [H. 715, b\ G. 1057: B. 331: Go, 
 536.] 
 
 IT. Verbal in Tos. See 75. 
 
 12. Emphatic future. [H. 1032: G. 1360: B. 569, 2: Go. 
 489, a.-} 
 
100 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART II 
 
 242. Let the instructor form several sentences, employ- 
 ing the words in 240 and involving the constructions in 
 241. These sentences should be written by the students 
 at sight. 
 
 BOOK II CHAPTER III 
 
 243. Sec. 1-8. 
 
 1. At sunrise, he told 1 the heralds to wait until he was at 
 
 leisure. 2 
 
 2. He stationed the army so that everybody was well 
 
 armed. 
 
 3. We will lead you to a place 3 whence you will get pro- 
 
 visions. 
 
 4. It was not clear that the truce was for every one. 
 
 244. Sec. 9-15. 
 
 1. He feared, however, that our 4 soldiers also 6 would have 
 
 the same fear. 
 
 2. He found that the trees had fallen down, so that they 
 
 could not cross. 6 
 
 3. If any one did not jump into the mud, he struck 7 him. 
 
 4. One cannot 8 see such palms in Greece. 
 
 245. Sec. 1 6-2 1. 
 
 i. Whenever the soldiers ate these, they wondered at the 
 peculiarity of the flavor. 
 
 1 clirov is sometimes used in the sense of command, and then is followed 
 by the Infinitive, instead of 8ri and o>s. 2 wait . . . leisure : the direct com- 
 mand was wait until I am at leisure. See 122, 123, 124. 8 Omit to a place. 
 * our . . . fear = the same fear would be to our soldiers. Use the Dative of 
 possession. 6 KaC. 6 so . . . cross : H. 927 : G. 1449, 1450 : B. 595 : Go. 
 566, b ; 639, a. With the Infinitive the negative is (JLT(; with the Indicative, ov. 
 7 av and the Aorist or Imperfect expresses a customary past action, and therefore 
 may be used in the conclusion of a past general condition. 8 Cf. TTIV ISctv. 
 
ANABASIS BOOK II/ CHA?. J 'IV IOI 
 
 2. I will ask the king l to give me the privilege 2 of doing 
 
 this. 
 
 3. I was the only one who arrived 3 with help. 
 
 4. We did not assemble with the avowed purpose 4 of 
 
 leading you here. 
 
 246. Sec. 22-29. 
 
 1. Now that 5 Cyrus is dead, we shall not betray you. 
 
 2. They would not kill him, if you would not trouble 6 
 
 them. 
 
 3. I did not allow him to buy provisions. 
 
 4. Afterwards, 7 the brother-in-law 8 of the king took an oath. 
 
 BOOK II CHAPTER IV 
 
 247. Sec. 1-5. 
 
 1. He does not bear malice against you 9 for the past 10 
 
 2. He will destroy the Greeks, that others may fear to 
 
 make an expedition against him. 11 
 
 3. He would not willingly, at least, wish M us to go away 
 
 and mock 13 him. 
 
 4. If we should do this, Ariaeus would not lead us. 14 
 
 248. Sec. 6-1 1. 
 
 i. I know 15 that the cavalry of the enemy is efficient 16 
 
 1 Genitive with irapd. 2 Omit : see the idiom in the text, sec. 18. 8 / 
 was . . . arrived '= I only (jwSvos) arrived. 4 ivith . . . purpose : H. 978: 
 G. 1574: B. 656, 3: Go. 593, c. 5 Now that: erreC. 6 would . . . trouble: 
 what kind "of a condition? 7 After this. 8 brother of the wife. 9 Dative. 
 10 H. 744: G. 1126: B. 366: Go. 509, c. n This refers to the subject of de- 
 stroy. What kind of a pronoun? 12 would not wish : av and the Optative. 
 13 and mock = having mocked : use the Aorist participle. 14 H. 741 : G. 
 1109: B. 356: Go. 510, c. ^ H. 982: G. 1588: B. 661 : Go. 586. 
 X.ov agios. 
 
IO2 ,; GREEK W FROSE COMPOSITION PART II 
 
 2. If * we should be conquered, whom would we save ? 
 
 3. If 1 Tissaphernes leads, we will proceed by ourselves. 
 
 4. This furnished suspicion so that they kept 2 away from 
 
 each other. 
 
 249. Sec. 12-17. 
 
 1. This wall was twenty parasangs 3 long. 4 
 
 2. They arrived at a city which was twenty stadia distant 
 
 from the park. 
 
 3. The pickets asked where they could see 5 the generals. 
 
 4. He intended to attack us, so that we could not 6 cross. 
 
 250. Sec. 18-23. 
 
 1 . The intention to attack 7 us frightened me. 
 
 2. If there are many across the river, it will not be neces- 
 
 sary for us to flee. 
 
 3. We asked him how many villages there were. 8 
 
 4. I fear 9 to do harm to the king. 
 
 251. Sec. 24-28. 
 
 1. When it is dawn, he intends to attack 10 them while 
 
 crossing. 
 
 2. He halted his own n army while the Greeks were pass- 
 
 ing by. 
 
 1 H. 969, d\ G. 1563, 5 : B. 614: Go. 583. 2 so . . . kept: if the actual 
 result is expressed, what mood is used? 3 What case expresses the measure? 
 4 = in length : Accusative of specification. 5 where they could see : direct, 
 where can we see? H. 872: G. 1327: B. 563: Go. 480. 6 pf is the nega- 
 tive of purpose clauses, after Eva, ws, or OTTWS. 7 The . . . attack : the Infini- 
 tive with (or without) the article is used as the subject. What tense would 
 be used here? 8 how . . . were : what was the direct question? 9 Consult 
 the vocabulary for the two meanings of OKV&D and the constructions following 
 it. 10 What tense often follows jiAXco? See the text. n The possessive 
 Genitive of the reflexive is in the attributive position. 
 
ANABASIS BOOK II, CHAPS. III-IV 
 
 103 
 
 3. As long as he looked 1 on, so long the Persian was 
 
 terrified. 
 
 4. He proceeded thirty parasangs, keeping the river on 
 
 his right. 
 
 REVIEW OF CHAPTERS III AND IV 
 
 252. Learn the following important words which occur 
 in Chapters III and IV. Memorize the principal parts 
 of the verbs, and, where indicated, notice the difference 
 between the active and middle meanings. 
 
 i. aicrx.vvco(act. and mid.) 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 4. 
 
 5. aiT0> 
 
 6. pc0Taco 
 
 7. avp<oTaa> 
 
 8. 
 
 9. 
 10. 
 1 1 . 
 
 21. TOS 
 
 22. <T010) 
 
 23. 
 
 24. <|>io"rr}fu 
 
 25. eirurTcuris 
 
 26. TTKrTpaTlf(0 
 
 27. eiucrrpaTcia 
 
 28. 
 
 12. -yc 
 
 13. 8iavo0|iai 
 
 14. SiaTpipa 
 
 15. ScrOXos 
 1 6. 8ao"us 
 
 I /. Kir\TJTT(0 
 
 1 8. '<j>o8os 
 
 19. 
 
 20. 
 
 29. 
 
 30. T]V0|JiaL 
 
 31. TjO- V X ia 
 
 32. 6VTJ(TKO> 
 
 33. dlTOKTlV(0 
 
 34. p,TJKOS 
 
 35. vx|/os 
 
 36. vovs 
 
 37. otos 
 
 38. 00V 
 
 39. 6mo"6o<|>DXaK'a> 
 
 40. OKV(0 
 
 1 This is a past general condition. 
 
104 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART II 
 
 41. -rrpo5i8a)|ii 45. <nxnro\)8da> 49. <|>pd 
 
 42. Trpo0i)|i0|iCH 46. (T)(oXd<o 5- t|f 
 
 43. (TTTCvSo) 47. TapttTTO) 
 
 44. cnrou8d<o 48. viroxj/ia 
 
 253. Review the following points of syntax : 
 
 1. Until, 122, 123, 124. 
 
 2. Result clauses and their negatives. [H. 927: G. 1449- 
 
 50: B. 595: Go. 566, b y 639, a.] 
 
 3. <bs and the participle. [H. 978: G. 1574: B. 656, 3: Go. 
 
 593* '-] 
 
 4. |JiTdi with the Genitive and the Accusative. 
 
 5. Genitive of cause. [H. 744: G. 1126: B. 366: Go. 509, ^.] 
 
 6. Case after verbs of Ruling. [H. 741: G. 1109: B. 356: 
 
 Go. 510.] 
 
 7. Verbs followed by the participle in indirect dis- 
 course. [H. 981, 982: G. 1588: B. 66 1 : Go. 586.] 
 
 8. Participle for the protasis. [H. 969, d\ G. 1563, 5: B. 
 614: Go. 583.] 
 
 9. Potential Optative. [H. 872: G. 1327: 6.563: 60.480.] 
 10. What case expresses the measure ? 
 
 254. Let the instructor form several sentences, employ- 
 ing the words in 252 and involving the constructions in 253. 
 These sentences should be written by the students at sight. 
 
 BOOK II CHAPTER V 
 
 255. Sec. 1-8. 
 
 1. They put an end 1 to these suspicions before 2 he met 
 
 Clearchus. 
 
 2. I perceive by observation 3 that you can not dispel the 
 
 distrust. 
 
 1 iravci> in the active means to make stop ; in the middle, to cease. 2 See 
 126. 3 by observation = by observing: present participle. 
 
ANABASIS BOOK II, CHAP. V 1 05 
 
 3. Some l do irreparable evils to their friends ; others 1 do 
 
 not intend to. 
 
 4. In the present case, into what sort of darkness can we 
 
 run 2 off ? 
 
 256. Sec. 9-15. 
 
 1. If we should try to kill you, every 3 crowd would be 
 
 very frightful. 
 
 2. Who is so mad as not to use 4 the forces of the king? 
 
 3. I think that I should punish 5 them by using you as 
 
 allies. 
 
 4. This being the case, 6 I shall not distrust you. 7 
 
 257. Sec. 16-23. 
 
 1. Well, 8 Clearchus, do I seem to lack infantry? 
 
 2. There are so many mountains over which 9 you must 
 
 proceed. 
 
 3. How, then, could we do 10 this by perjury ? 
 
 4. I know in how many ways n you are useful to me. 
 
 258. Sec. 24-33. 
 
 1. Those who try to slander us are worthy 12 of suffering 
 
 death. 
 
 2. Clearchus evidently thought that he ought to go to 
 
 Tissaphernes. 
 
 1 ol |xv . . . ol Sc. 2 The potential Optative. 8 irds in the singular without 
 the article often means every. 4 See 159. 5 should punish : the student will 
 notice that when av and the Infinitive depend upon otficu, av is placed close to 
 otfxcu. 6 This . . . case: cf. the idiom in the text, sec. 12. 7 H. 764, 2: G. 
 1 160 : B. 376 : Go. 520. 8 dXXd. 9 over which : H. 715, b : G. 1057 : B. 331 : 
 Go. 536. 10 could we do : cf. irws av f;\oi|j.0a, sec. 20. n in . . . ways : an 
 Accusative of specification. 12 aios is one of the adjectives followed by the 
 Infinitive. 
 
106 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART II 
 
 3. We suspect that he is secretly meeting the enemy with 1 
 
 Ariaeus. 
 
 4. At the same signal we killed whoever were 2 inside. 
 
 259. Sec. 34-42. 
 
 1. We were all frightened, and thought 3 that the king 
 
 would come immediately. 
 
 2. He will demand of us 4 our arms, because we are his. 5 
 
 3. We swore that we would betray the same men. 
 
 4. Send our generals here, since they will give the best 
 
 advice Q for both you and us. 
 
 BOOK II CHAPTER VI 
 
 260. Sec. 1-7 
 
 1. These generals, who had been captured 7 in this way, 
 
 were beheaded. 
 
 2. When he no longer obeyed, he sailed off 8 to wage war 
 
 on the Thracians. 
 
 3. When Clearchus is allowed 9 to have money, he chooses 
 
 to spend it on war. 
 
 4. All acknowledged that he was 10 warlike and fond of 
 
 danger. 
 
 261. Sec. 8-15. 
 
 i. Clearchus was capable 11 of impressing on his soldiers 
 that they must obey him. 12 
 
 1 Genitive with fierd ; not Dative with <rvv. 2 we . . . inside : what kind 
 of a condition? 3 were frightened and thought being frightened, thought. 
 4 Would this be Genitive? 11.724: G. 1069: B. 340: Go. 535. 5 of him. 
 6 give the best advice advise the best things. 1 who . . . captured: see 40. 
 * sailed off = went off sailing. 9 When . . . alloived ': H. 973: 0.1569: B. 
 343: Go. 591. H. 981 : G. 1588: B. 66 1 : Go. 586. n H. 952: G. 1526: 
 B. 641 : Go. 565, a. 12 An indirect reflexive. 
 
ANABASIS BOOK II, CHAP. VI 1 07 
 
 2. He used to say 1 that the soldiers ought to fear him 
 
 more than they do the enemy. 
 
 3. Whenever they could, 2 many chose another general. 
 
 4. The fact that they did not fear 3 the enemy made them 
 
 courageous. 
 
 262. Sec. 16-23. 
 
 1. From early boyhood, Proxenus desired great power. 4 
 
 2. He did not think that he ought to impress on his sol- 
 
 diers fear of himself. 5 
 
 3. Those who did wrong 6 evidently distrusted him. 
 
 4. Menon is deceitful, that he may do wrong without 7 
 
 being punished. 
 
 263. Sec. 24-30. 
 
 i . We thought that we alone knew how many were 8 per- 
 jured. 
 
 2. Menon delighted in 9 being able to slander his friends. 
 
 3. By doing wrong 10 with them, he expected 11 his soldiers 
 
 to obey him. 12 
 
 4. Although they had done 13 the same things, his fellow 
 
 generals were not tortured. 
 
 1 What tense expresses this idea? 2 they could: use ggciiu. 8 The fact 
 . . .fear : the Infinitive with the article is often used as the subject of a verb. 
 The negative is jx^. 4 iri6\>|j,a> is followed by the Genitive. 5 What kind 
 of a reflexive? 6 Those . . . wrong : see 40. 7 that . . . punished: notice 
 the idiom at the end of sec. 21, in the text. 8 The direct question was how 
 many are? 9 in being able : see 161. 10 By doing wrong: IK TOV and the 
 Infinitive. n agioo). 12 Review the use of the reflexives. See 43 and 47. 
 13 Although . . . done: H. 969, e : G. 1563, 6: B. 653, 7: Go. 583. 
 
io8 
 
 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART II 
 
 REVIEW OF CHAPTERS V AND VI 
 
 264. Learn the following important words which occur 
 in Chapters V and VI. Memorize the principal parts of 
 the verbs, and, where indicated, notice the difference be- 
 tween the active and middle meanings. 
 
 1 8. 
 
 IQ. 
 
 20. 
 21. 
 
 22. 
 
 23. Oavaroa) 
 
 24. T]80|1CU 
 
 25. 
 26. 
 27. 
 28. 
 
 29. 
 
 30. 
 
 31. |iTa|i\Ci) 
 
 32. |l|i(j)0)JLai 
 
 33. 
 34. 
 
 2. dm<TTG> 
 
 3. dmoria 
 
 4. dSlK<0 
 
 5. d|i6o) 
 
 6. Sia/irpaTTo 
 
 7. 8v<nropos 
 
 8. cvrropos 
 9. 
 
 35. iraxioDCact. and 
 
 mid.) 
 36. 
 37. 
 
 38. iropos 
 
 39. diropos 
 
 40. cra(j>cas 
 
 41. (rvvaSiK(o 
 
 42. crvvaKoXovOcco 
 43. 
 
 44. (TT]|iLOV 
 
 45. 
 46. 
 
 47. TL|JLO)pia 
 
 48. TpOTTOS 
 
 49. 
 50. 
 
 II. 
 12. 
 13. 
 
 14. 
 
 15. OpKOS 
 
 1 6. 
 
 I/. 
 
 265. Review the following points of syntax : 
 
 1. Before, 126. 
 
 2. irds with and without the article. [H. 672, b\ 6.455.] 
 
 3. Relative clause of result, 159. 
 
 4. Verbs followed by the Dative. [H. 764, 2: G. 1160: B. 
 376: Go. 520.] 
 
ANABASIS BOOK III, CHAP. I 1 09 
 
 5. Verbals in TOS. [H. 988-990: G. 1594-97: B. 663-666: Go. 
 
 352-354.] 
 
 6. SfjXos and <}>avp6s (^tju). [H. 981 : G. 1589: B. 661 : Go. 
 
 586.] 
 
 7. Verbs followed by two Accusatives. [H. 724: G. 1069: 
 B. 340: Go. 535.] 
 
 8. Use of the participle for a relative clause, 40. 
 
 9. Accusative absolute. [H. 973: G. 1569: 6.343: 60.591.] 
 
 10. Adjectives followed by the Infinitive. [H. 952: G. 
 
 1526: B. 641 : Go. 565, a.~\ 
 
 11. Use of the reflexive pronouns, 43, 47. 
 
 12. The article and the Infinitive, 161. 
 
 13. Various meanings of the participle. [11.969: G. 1563: 
 
 B. 653, 1-8: Go. 583.] 
 
 266. Let the instructor form several sentences, employ- 
 ing the words in 264 and involving the constructions in 
 265. These sentences should be written by the students 
 at sight. 
 
 BOOK III CHAPTER I 
 
 267. Sec. 1-5. 
 
 1. If no one furnishes a market place for the Greeks, they 
 
 will not taste of food. 1 
 
 2. They think that they 2 will never again see their wives 
 
 and children. 
 
 3. I promise you that, if you come, Cyrus will be 3 your 
 
 friend. 
 
 4. They suspected 4 that Xenophon would become a friend 
 
 to the Spartans. 
 
 1 H. 742: G. 1 102: B. 356: Go. 510. 2 When may the subject of an 
 Infinitive be omitted? 8 that . . . will be: what was the direct discourse? 
 4 H. 887: G. 1378: B. 594: Go. 610, 611. 
 
1 10 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART II 
 
 268. Sec. 6-12. 
 
 1. He asks the god whether 1 it is better for him 2 to go or 
 
 to remain at Athens. 
 
 2. As soon as I set out on the journey inland, the expedi- 
 
 tion will be against the Pisidians. 3 
 
 3. It was clear that the majority 4 were unwilling. 
 
 4. He feared that the dream was from Zeus. 
 
 269. Sec. 13-18. 
 
 1. If we get into the 5 power of the enemy at daybreak, 
 
 we shall never be older. 
 
 2. We declared war against the enemy before we made 
 
 preparations. 
 
 3. Would they not resort 6 to every means to torture 
 
 us? 
 
 4. We must take care that he does not make us slaves. 7 
 
 270. Sec. 19-25. 
 
 1. I never ceased considering how many provisions the 
 
 king has. 
 
 2. We have no share 8 in these good things, except by pur- 
 
 chase. 9 
 
 3. Since we do not perjure ourselves, 10 we refrain from 
 
 these prizes. 
 
 4. If you do not wish me to lead, I will follow you. 
 
 1 See 136. 2 To whom does this refer? 3 As soon . . . Pisidians : a vivid 
 future relative condition. 4 the majority : ol iroXXoC. 5 into the power of: 
 eirC with the Dative. 6 Would . . . resort: H. 1015 : G. 1603 : B. 572 : Go. 668. 
 7 that . . . slaves : H. 885 : G. 1372 : B. 593 : Go. 638, a. 8 See the vocabulary 
 for the construction following |ATIJU. 9 except by purchase = if we do not buy. 
 What negative is used in the protasis? 10 Since . . . ourselves : participle. 
 
ANABASIS BOOK III, CHAP. I III 
 
 271. Sec. 26-33. 
 
 1 . We can not get safety l in any other way than by per- 
 
 suading the king. 
 
 2. We will not surrender our arms until 2 we get a 
 
 truce. 
 
 3. I think that we ought to take away his captaincy. 
 
 4. Wherever there is no general, they summon a lieu- 
 
 tenant general. 
 
 272. Sec. 34-38. 
 
 1. We shall plan whatever good we can. 3 
 
 2. If you should not evidently be making preparations 
 
 against the enemy, the soldiers would be cowards. 
 
 3. Know well, however, that you get more honor than 
 
 these. 4 
 
 4. By 5 doing this, I think that you would help the 
 
 army. 
 
 273. Sec. 39-47. 
 
 1. This being the case, I know that they would go to their 
 
 arms despondently. 
 
 2. Soldiers, strive 6 to die nobly. 
 
 3. We praised them for what they said and did. 
 
 4. Let us elect the generals and come 7 into the middle of 
 
 the camp. 
 
 1 Cf. the text in sec. 26. 2 until . . . truce : see 122, 123, 124. 3 what- 
 ever . . . can = if we are able any good thing. Review conditions in 113-115. 
 4 get . . . these = get more than these in honor. 5 By doing this : use parti- 
 ciple. 6 to die nobly : irpl TOV and the Infinitive. " Let us elect . . . and 
 come = having elected . . . let us come (hortatory Subjunctive). 
 
112 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART II 
 
 BOOK III CHAPTER II 
 
 274. Sec. 1-6. 
 
 1. After the election of the generals, 1 Chirisophus said, 
 
 " Our former allies have deserted us." 
 
 2. May we never, at least alive, get 2 into the hands of the 
 
 enemy. 
 
 3. He swore in person 3 that he would consider it of the 
 
 greatest importance not to destroy us. 
 
 4. We must never again suffer this. 
 
 275. Sec. 7-1 1. 
 
 1. It is right 4 to equip myself for war as best I can. 
 
 2. If we inflict punishment 5 on the enemy, we shall not 
 
 be greatly discouraged. 
 
 3. I happened to be saying that the enemy have broken 
 
 the truce, contrary to the oaths. 
 
 4. The Persians came to destroy 6 Athens utterly. 
 
 276. Sec. 12-17. 
 
 1. We vowed that we would find as many she-goats as we 
 
 killed 7 of the enemy. 
 
 2. Although 8 Xerxes collected a numberless host, he did 
 
 not, at that time, conquer our ancestors. 
 
 1 After . . . generals when the generals had been elected. H. 837 : G. 
 1261. 2 May . . . get: see 70-72. 3 in person : avr6s. 4 It is right : use 
 6p0ws X. Notice that \ with adverbs means to be. 6 inflict punishment : 
 for this expression, see the text (sec. 8, line 7). 6 to destroy . . . utterly : ex- 
 press in at least three ways. See 79. 7 we would . . . killed : the vow in the 
 direct form was we will find . . . as we kill, which was a vivid future relative 
 condition. 8 How is a concession commonly expressed in Greek? See H. 
 969, e: G. 1563, 6: B. 653, 7: Go. 583. 
 
ANABASIS BOOK III, CHAP. II 113 
 
 3. Why is it fitting for you to be more courageous ? 
 
 4. Do not l be drawn up with the men of Ariaeus. 
 
 277. Sec. 18-23. 
 
 1. Bear in mind that horsemen are not the 2 ones who win 
 
 victories. 
 
 2. We will strike whomever we wish. 
 
 3. It is better to take provisions than to use their 3 measure. 
 
 4. I say that we are braver than they are.* 
 
 278. Sec. 24-28. 
 
 1. I, at least, say that you ought to live somewhere 5 here. 
 
 2. If we had once learned to live in idleness, we should 
 
 have forgotten 6 the way home. 
 
 3. It is the privilege of the conquerors to say how many 7 
 
 good things they can have. 8 
 
 4. In the second place I think it is best to get rid of the 
 
 superfluous baggage. 
 
 279. Sec. 29-34. 
 
 1. They thought that we should perish, if there were no 9 
 
 leaders. 
 
 2. You ought to punish the one who disobeys. 10 
 
 3. In this way you will allow no one to be a coward. 
 
 4. Let all who think this best raise n their hands. 
 
 1 Do . . .up: see 62. 2 the ones who win : see 40. win : iroi&i>. 8 Use 
 Kivos in the predicate position. 4 Omit. 5 Notice that irov, where? is an 
 interrogative, while irov is enclitic, meaning somewhere. Likewise irs, how ? 
 irws, somehow. 6 H. 742: G 1102: B. 356: Go. 511. 7 how many : oirocra. 
 ' how many . . . have : the direct question was a potential Optative, how many 
 good things can we have? H. 872: G. 1327 : B. 563 : Go. 480. 9 When the 
 participle is used for the protasis, the negative is JJLTJ. 10 the one who dis- 
 obeys : see 40. n Let all raise : the third person of the Imperative is used 
 in exhortations of the third person. 
 
 GK. PROSE COMP. 8 
 
114 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART II 
 
 280. Sec. 35-39- 
 
 1. If the enemy should follow after us, it would probably 
 
 be safer for us to form 1 a square. 
 
 2. We ought to be able to use immediately those who 
 
 have been drawn up. 
 
 3. May Chirisophus for the present lead this square. 
 
 4. Let us therefore remember 2 to be brave. 
 
 REVIEW OF CHAPTERS I AND II 
 
 281. Learn the following important words which occur 
 in Chapters I and II. Memorize the principal parts of the 
 verbs, and, where indicated, notice the difference between 
 the active and middle meanings. 
 
 1. cryapco 
 
 2. d8\)|l(0 
 
 3. dOvfiia 
 
 4. dOvjjicos 
 
 5. aUk'oiiai 
 
 6. dp/uva> 
 
 7. dva-yfyvcicrKa) 
 
 8. dvaKotvoo) 
 
 9. dva|lV(0 
 
 10. dvarcivco 
 
 11. cnroTivco 
 
 12. dpxaios 
 
 13. a<()8ovos 
 
 14. 8iipyco 
 
 15. Tl 
 
 16. feVyovos 
 
 17. irpd-yovos 
 
 1 8. m|X\0|J.ai 
 
 19. m(i\TJs 
 
 20. TjTTao|iai 
 
 21. KaOcvSco 
 
 22. KaTClKl|iai 
 
 23. Kaipos 
 
 24. XTJY<O 
 
 25. X{ryx& VCl > 
 
 26. Xinreco 
 
 2 Let us remember : in an exhortation of the first person, use 
 
 the Subjunctive; in one of the third person, the Imperative. Notice that the 
 
 Perfect middle of |U}j,Wj<rK<i> is used with a present meaning. Note the differ- 
 ence between the active and middle meaning. 
 
ANABASIS BOOK III, CHAPS. I-II 
 
 115 
 
 27. Xvirfj 
 
 28. |il|Jl0|JLai 
 
 29. |U|ivfjcrKa> (act. and mid.) 
 
 30. oxXos 
 
 31. irarpis 
 
 32. irXauriov 
 
 33. ir66os 
 34. 
 
 35. 
 
 36. cra<t>TJs 
 
 37. dcrd<j)ia 
 
 38. GTK1)OS 
 
 39. <jKvo<|>opa> 
 
 40. 0-Kl)0(|>6pOS 
 
 41. crrpo}i<u 
 
 42. vppio 
 
 43. i5p pis 
 
 44. inroXa[ipdva> 
 45. 
 
 46. 
 47. 
 48. 
 49. 
 
 50. 0)V0|Xai 
 
 282. Review the following points of syntax : 
 
 1. Verbs followed by the Genitive. [H. 742: G. 1102: B. 
 
 356: Go. 510, 511.] 
 
 2. Indirect questions, 136. 
 
 3. frircos and the Future Indicative. [H. 885: G. 1372: B. 
 
 593: Go. 638, a."] 
 
 4. General conditions, 92. 107-109. 
 
 5. Relative conditions, 113-115. 
 
 6. Wishes, 70-72. 
 
 7. Purpose clauses, 79. 
 
 8. Prohibitions, 62. 
 
 9. Participle for a relative clause, 40. 
 
 10. Potential Optative. [H. 872: G. 1327: B. 563: Go, 480.] 
 
 11. Exhortations, 59 and 60. 
 
 12. The Perfect middle system of |U|ivTJ<rKco. 
 
 283. Let the instructor form several sentences, employ- 
 ing the words in 281 and involving the constructions in 282. 
 These sentences should be written by the students at sight. 
 
Il6 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART II 
 
 BOOK III CHAPTER III 
 
 284. Sec. 1-6. 
 
 1. We shall share with one another whatever we dp not 
 
 throw l into the fire. 
 
 2. If I should see that they are planning some safety, I 
 
 should tell you what I have in mind. 
 
 3. You cannot be saved without my consent. 2 
 
 4. When Mithridates appears, we shall go away. 8 
 
 285. Sec. 7-14. 
 
 1. We do not shoot far enough to reach the Persians. 4 
 
 2. While we were fleeing, we injured them by shooting 5 
 
 backward. 
 
 3. Within this day, we must pass over 6 twenty stadia. 
 
 4. I suffered harm in not advancing. 7 
 
 286. Sec. 15-20. 
 
 1. The barbarians were so swift that we could not catch 
 
 them. 
 
 2. We need slingers, 8 in order to injure them as they pro- 
 
 ceed. 
 
 3. If you give them money, they will probably help us 
 
 somewhat. 9 
 
 4. I see that many horses have been left behind. 
 
 ^whatever . . . throw: H. 1019, IO2I : G. 1383, I: B. 600: Go. 646. 
 2 without my consent : cf. f3a<ri\cos O.KOVTOS. 8 go away : cf. W'XCTO ciiruov. 
 4 We . . . Persians : cf. the text in latter part of sec. 7. 5 by shooting : use 
 the participle. 6 pass over : SUp\o|xai. 7 in not advancing : 4v TW and In- 
 finitive. See H. 1023: G. 1611. 8 Genitive. 9 = in respect to something, rl. 
 
ANABASIS BOOK III, CHAP. IV H7 
 
 BOOK III CHAPTER IV 
 
 287. Sec. 1-9. 
 
 1. I fear that they must 1 cross the ravine. 
 
 2. We promised that if he should give us so many, we 
 
 would do much damage. 2 
 
 3. When the enemy follow, 3 the Greeks will mutilate the 
 
 dead. 
 
 4. This city was taken by 4 siege. 
 
 288. Sec. 10-17. 
 
 1. This wall was one hundred and fifty feet high. 
 
 2. They came into view 5 with the force with which they 
 
 aided the king. 
 
 3. Whenever the Rhodians shot, they did not miss their 6 
 
 man. 7 
 
 4. We shall continue to use 8 the arrows which have been 
 
 taken. 
 
 289. Sec. 18-23. 
 
 1. The Greeks happened upon the village, and laid in pro- 
 
 visions during the following day. 
 
 2. If the road is ever too 9 narrow, the hoplites are thrown 
 
 into confusion. 
 
 3. Whenever they had to cross a bridge, the enemy at- 
 
 tacked them. 
 
 1 H. 411 : G. 495, x > 2: B. T 99> 2: G- 3 21 - 2 d Damage : 
 iroXXd KO.KOI. 3 When . . .follow : Genitive absolute. * by siege by besieging. 
 5 cam* into view : notice the difference in meaning between <j>aCva> and liri- 
 <|>aivtt. 6 Omit. 7 H. 748: G. 1099. 8 continue to use : H. 981 : G. 1580: 
 B. 660 : Go. 585. 9 The comparative degree often expresses this idea. 
 
Il8 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART II 
 
 4. The interval l was so 2 wide that they did not 3 cross by 
 companies. 
 
 290. Sec. 24-33. 
 
 1. Then the Persians attacked them, as they were ascend- 
 
 ing the second hill. 
 
 2. The light-armed soldiers will be useless, because they 
 
 are shut up 4 inside of the hoplites. 
 
 3. We feared that they would go along parallel with us. 
 
 4. Necessity taught the barbarians not 5 to skirmish with 
 
 the Greeks. 
 
 291. Sec. 34-40. 
 
 1. The Persian has to 6 mount his horse when there is 
 
 confusion. 
 
 2. The Greeks broke camp within hearing of the enemy. 7 
 
 3. On the fourth day, the Greeks intended to pass by the 
 
 spur of a mountain. 
 
 4. We can 8 see that the hill has been taken ahead of us. 
 
 292. Sec. 41-49. 
 
 1. If you desire, take 9 the men and proceed to the moun- 
 
 tain. 
 
 2. "Well," said 10 Xenophon, "I urge you to send picked 
 
 men with me." 
 
 1 rb Sic'xov. 2 ovTtt. 8 If the Infinitive follows OXTTC, the negative is ii-fj, 
 while o\> is the negative used with the Indicative. 4 because . . . shut up : 
 H. 969, b: G. 1563, 2 : B. 653, 4 : Go. 583. 6 JATJ' is the regular negative for 
 the Infinitive. In indirect discourse ov may be used, being retained from ov of 
 the direct. 6 has to : bear in mind that 8t is regularly followed by the Accu- 
 sative and the Infinitive, not the Dative. 7 within . . . enemy : Genitive ab- 
 solute. 8 |CTTI. 9 Participle; what tense? 10 Notice that <|>T](iC is the 
 verb of saying, which is generally used in the middle of a direct quotation. 
 
ANABASIS BOOK III, CHAPS. III-V 1 19 
 
 3. Consider that after a little toil 1 you will see your wives. 
 
 4. We captured the height before 2 the Persians. 
 
 BOOK III CHAPTER V 
 
 293. Sec. 1-9. 
 
 1. These were captured while scattered in the plain. 
 
 2. We are apprehensive lest they should not concede the 
 
 country to be ours. 
 
 3. The river was so deep 3 that they did not try the depth. 4 
 
 4. Provide for me what 5 I need. 
 
 294. Sec. 10-18. 
 
 1. By throwing on wood, I shall keep you from slipping. 6 
 
 2. The captives 7 said that the king passed the summer at 
 
 Susa. 
 
 3. They also said 8 that these people made a treaty in the 
 
 plain. 
 
 4. Whenever they eat dinner, everybody halts. 
 
 REVIEW OF CHAPTERS III, IV, AND V 
 
 295. Learn the following important words which occur 
 in Chapters III, IV, and V. Memorize the principal parts 
 of the verbs, and, where indicated, notice the difference 
 between the active and middle meanings. 
 
 1. at| 3. cucpov 5. d|uXXdo|iai 
 
 2. alx^dXcoTOS 4. a,KpopoXio|icu 6. cnroT|iv0> 
 
 1 after . . . toil : participle. 2 captured . . . before : use 4>0dva>. See the 
 text at end of sec. 49. See 169. 3 so deep so much in respect to depth, 
 * H. 738: G. 1099: B. 356: Go. 510. 6 What case follows verbs of plenty 
 and want ? 6 from slipping = so as not to slip. 7 the captives those who 
 had been taken. 8 Use <|>T)jiC. 
 
I2O 
 
 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART II 
 
 8. dfiapTdvco 
 
 9. dvaxcopc'co 
 
 10. iravax<>pa) 
 
 11. do-KOS 
 12. 
 
 17. 8iacj>0Lpa> 
 
 18. 
 
 19. 
 
 2O. 
 
 21. 
 
 22. 
 
 13. SWXP'HO'TOS 23. |lKV0|iCU 
 
 14. pcXos 24. 
 
 15. ppa X vs 25. 
 
 1 6. 8CD 26. 
 
 37. XoiSope'co 
 
 38. |iaKp6s 
 
 39. V00> 
 
 40. VVOOfiCU 
 
 41. 6Xur9dva> 
 
 42. ojxoios 
 
 43. irXarvs 
 
 27. 
 
 28. T|VlKa 
 
 29. Kaco 
 
 30. KLV(0 
 
 . 31. 
 
 32. 
 33. 
 
 34. Kara<|)pova> 
 
 35. X6<()os 
 
 36. YH^^os 
 
 44. TTOppO) 
 
 45- 
 
 46. crrp'<|>eo 
 
 47. aTv6s 
 
 48. -ux|/iiX6s 
 
 49- <t>d(TK(0 
 
 50. <|>9dvco 
 
 296. Review the following points of syntax : 
 
 1. Negative of protasis and apodosis. [H. 1019, 1021: G. 
 
 1383, I : B. 600: Go. 646.] 
 
 2. The negative used with Infinitive. [H. 1023: G. 1611$ 
 6.633: 60.564.] 
 
 3. Contraction of dissyllables in co. [H. 411: G. 495, i, 2: 
 
 B. 199, 2: Go. 321.] 
 
 4. Verbs governing the Genitive. [H. 748, 738: G, 1099: B. 
 356: Go. 510, 511.] 
 
 5. Supplementary participle. [H. 981: G. 1580: B. 660: Go. 
 585-] 
 
 6. The negatives with result clauses, 289, note 4. 
 
 7. Various translations of the participle. [H. 969: G. 
 1563: 6.653: 00.583.] 
 
 8. Use of <j>6dvo), 169. 
 
ANABASIS BOOK IV, CHAP. I 121 
 
 297. Let the instructor form several sentences, employ- 
 ing the words in 295 and involving the constructions in 
 296. These sentences should be written by the students 
 at sight. 
 
 BOOK IV CHAPTER I 
 
 298. Sec. i- 10. 
 
 1. I hear from the captives 1 that we shall have to 2 cross 
 
 the sources of the Tigris. 
 
 2. There was danger that the enemy would perceive 3 
 
 them. 
 
 3. The Greeks did not carry off their wives and children, 
 
 in order that they might let them pass through. 
 
 4. Some of the Carduchi suddenly fell upon the Greeks. 
 
 299. Sec. 11-18. 
 
 1. If, however, the enemy had been more numerous, we 
 
 should all have been wounded. 
 
 2. The generals decided that they must leave the rest 
 
 behind, because there were many disabled. 4 
 
 3. Whenever the snow is deep, 5 the enemy attack us vigor- 
 
 ously. 
 
 4. A brave man was shot in the head. 6 
 
 300. Sec. 19-28. 
 
 i. We could not bury the dead and fight at the same time. 7 
 
 1 from the captives : Genitive of source. 2 have to : use &o>. 8 that . . . 
 perceive H. 887: G. 1378: B. 594: Go. 610, 611. 4 because . . . disabled: 
 Genitive absolute. disabled: diropaxos. 5 iroXvs. 6 in the head : H. 718 : 
 G. 1058 : B. 337 : Go. 537. * bury . . . time . cft ^^OVTCS ajxa |xdx<re<u in 
 sec. 19. 
 
122 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART II 
 
 2. If they trouble 1 us, I will form an ambush and take a 
 
 them alive. 
 
 3. The guide was asked if it were impossible to pass by 
 
 the height. 
 
 4. " The whole 3 army/' said he, " will follow under my 
 
 command." 
 
 BOOK IV CHAPTER II 
 
 301. Sec. 1-6. 
 
 1. After binding the guide, we agreed to hold the pass 
 
 during the day. 
 
 2. We must cross without being seen. 4 
 
 3. They tried to approach the entrance 5 until it was dark. 
 
 4. The guards thought that they were encamped on this 
 
 road. 
 
 302. Sec. 7-13. 
 
 1. When they heard the trumpet, 6 Chirisophus and his 
 
 men rushed against the enemy. 
 
 2. He had to either proceed along 7 the road or be cut off 
 
 from the rest. 
 
 3. If we leave a retreat, the enemy will escape. 
 
 4. Xenophon feared that the hill would be taken 8 by the 
 
 enemy. 
 
 303. Sec. 14-21. 
 
 i. We suspected 9 that we should be surrounded if they 
 should depart. 
 
 irap\a). 2 form . . . and take = having formed '. . . shall 
 take. 3 iras has the predicate position. 4 cross . . . seen : cf. XdOoicv in sec. 
 2, and for its use, see H. 984: G. 1586: B. 660, n. : G. 585, a. 6 Dative. 
 6 H. 742: G. 1 102: B. 356: Go. 511. 7 Kara. 8 What verb is regularly 
 used as the passive of alpaca? 9 Is this a verb of saying or thinking? 
 
ANABASIS BOOK IV, CHAP. Ill 123 
 
 2. He said that they arrived at the village by jumping 
 
 down the ledge. 
 
 3. We shall give up the dead on condition that 1 the enemy 
 
 do not rush against us. 
 
 4. One man had his leg crushed. 2 
 
 304. Sec. 22-28. 
 
 1 . The wine was so plentiful that they encamped 3 there. 
 
 2. Whenever Xenophon sallied forth from the rear, he 
 
 got above the blockaders. 4 
 
 3. Sometimes 5 we troubled the barbarians. 
 
 4. The arrows which they used were more than two cubits 
 
 in length. 
 
 BOOK IV CHAPTER III 
 
 305. Sec. 1-9. 
 
 1. They remembered 6 all 7 they suffered at the hands of 
 
 the king. 
 
 2. They armed themselves to prevent the enemy from 
 
 crossing. 8 
 
 3. If they ever retreated, they became exposed to the 
 
 missiles. 
 
 4. During 9 this night, Xenophon had a dream. 
 
 306. Sec. 10-17. 
 
 i. One might 10 approach Xenophon while he was eating 
 dinner. 
 
 1 on condition that : 4<j>' u> and the Infinitive. 2 had . . . crushed '= was 
 crushed in respect to his leg. 3 What is the difference between the Indicative 
 and Infinitive in a result clause after <rr? H. 927: G. 1450: B. 595: Go. 
 566, b, 639, a. 4 the blockaders = those hindering. 6 -qv Sc OITOTC. 6 H. 
 742: G. 1 102: B. 356: Go. 511. 7 = all things as many as, irdvrwv o<rv. 
 8 from crossing : 11.963: 6.1549: 6.643: 60.572-573. 9 Is this duration 
 of time ? 10 one might = it was impossible to (c^ori). 
 
124 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART II 
 
 2. They decided that it was safe to strip and cross 1 the 
 
 river. 
 
 3. How 2 can we conquer 3 those in front? 
 
 4. The young men led the way, with some on their right 
 
 and some on their left. 
 
 307. Sec. 18-26. 
 
 1. He runs at full speed to shut off the men along the 
 
 river. 
 
 2. We shouted to them not 4 to flee. 
 
 3. When we saw what was going on 5 across the river, we 
 
 attacked the enemy. 
 
 4. Xenophon passed along the command to wheel against 
 
 the Carduchi. 
 
 308. Sec. 27-34. 
 
 1. Whenever we begin to cross, we sing songs. 
 
 2. He ordered us to run as soon as the enemy wheeled 
 
 about. 6 
 
 3. The man who gets across first 7 will be the best. 
 
 4. When the Greeks had crossed, the majority were still 
 
 plainly 8 running. 
 
 REVIEW OF CHAPTERS I, II, AND III 
 
 309. Learn the following important words which occur 
 in Chapters I, II, and III. Memorize the principal parts 
 
 1 to strip and cross having stripped to cross. 2 irws. 8 can we con- 
 quer : H. 872: G. 1327: B. 563: Go. 480. 4 |Mj. 6 what was going on' 
 see 40. 6 run . . . about : the direct command was, as soon as the enemy 
 wheel about, run. Remember that the Imperative expresses future time. 
 7 get across first : irlpav . . . ytyvoiuu. 8 were plainly : <j>avp6s dpi. 
 
ANABASIS BOOK IV, CHAPS. I-III 
 
 125 
 
 of the verbs, and, where indicated, notice the difference 
 between the active and middle meanings. 
 
 1. CLVCO 
 
 2. CLT 
 3- 
 
 4- 
 5- 
 
 6. 
 
 7. ocSticD 
 
 8. diroSvo 
 
 9. 8a\|/iXTJs 
 
 10. X"YX> 
 
 11. V8pV(0 
 
 12. 
 
 13- 
 14. 
 
 IS- 
 
 1 6. KvXivSo 
 
 17. KDK\6(0 
 
 1 8. icpdros 
 
 19. Kp|iafiai 
 
 20. XiOos 
 
 21. XavBdvco 
 
 22. [1VT|[10VV< 
 
 23. VKp6s 
 
 24. L<ro8os 
 
 25. d({>oSos 
 
 310. Review the following points of syntax : 
 
 1. Genitive of source, 16. 
 
 2. Construction after verbs of Fearing. [H.88;: G. 1378: 
 B. 594: Go. 610, 611.] 
 
 26. 
 
 27. 6x611 
 
 28. oiipavds 
 
 29. TTpOO-|UYVU|ll 
 
 30. CTXJfJlfiL'yVUfJlL 
 
 31. ircXd^co 
 
 32. ircrpa 
 
 33. 
 
 34. 
 
 35- 
 
 36. irpoo-pdXXco 
 
 37- TrilX^S 
 
 38. CTK'XOS 
 
 39. o-qfjiaiva) 
 
 40. <TTp<|)(0 
 
 41. (T(j>a'ytd^o|JLai 
 
 42. KaTacr<()dTTci> 
 
 43. T0)S 
 
 44. 
 45. 
 
 46. 
 
 47. 
 48. 
 49. 
 50. 
 
126 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART II 
 
 3. Accusative of specification, or Greek Accusative. 
 
 [H. 718: G. 1058: B. 337: Go. 537.] 
 
 4. Construction after Xav6dvo>. [H. 984: G. 1586.] See 
 169. 
 
 5. Case following ircXd^a). [H. 772 : G. 1175 : B. 392: Go. 525.] 
 
 6. Verbs followed by the Genitive. [H. 742: G. 1102: B. 
 
 356: Go. 510, 511.] 
 
 7. Result clauses. [H. 927: G. 1450: 6.595, 597: Go. 566, b, 
 619.] 
 
 8. Construction after verbs of Hindering. [H. 963: G. 
 1549: 6.643: Go. 572-573-] 
 
 9. Potential Optative. [H. 872: G. 1327: B. 563: Go. 480.] 
 10. Use of participle for a relative clause, 40. 
 
 311. Let the instructor form several sentences, employ- 
 ing the words in 309 and involving the constructions in 310. 
 These sentences should be written by the students at sight. 
 
 BOOK IV CHAPTER IV 
 
 312. Sec. 1-13. 
 
 1. Because 1 of the enemy, they proceeded through Ar- 
 
 menia. 
 
 2. We made a treaty on condition that we should take as 
 
 much provision as we needed. 2 
 
 3. The snow was so deep 3 that the men were covered. 
 
 4. While they were scattered, they saw many fires. 
 
 313. Sec. 14-22. 
 
 1 . We suffered punishment, because we burned the villages. 
 
 2. Whatever things were not 4 facts, he did not report. 
 
 1 Notice carefully the difference between 8id with the Accusative and the 
 Genitive. 2 take . . . needed '= take provision as much as we need. 8 air\- 
 TOS. 4 H. 1025, a\ G. 1612: B. 600: Go. 646. 
 
ANABASIS BOOK IV, CHAP. V 
 
 3. We asked him who would attack us. 1 
 
 4. We left a garrison and proceeded with the man who had 
 
 been captured. 
 
 BOOK IV CHAPTER V 
 
 314. Sec. i-ii. 
 
 1. We must seize the pass before they attack us. 
 
 2. Many perished, because the north wind blew in their 
 
 faces. 2 
 
 3. Unless you admit us to the fire, we will not share 3 
 
 with you what we have. 
 
 4. When they had eaten something, they came to the 
 
 mayor. 
 
 315. Sec. 12-20. 
 
 1. Whoever did not have 4 something black as a protec- 
 
 tion, lost their eyes. 5 
 
 2. We requested the sick not to be left behind. 
 
 3. On account 6 of the steaming, we thought that the snow 
 
 would melt. 
 
 4. They went along and found out what the hindrance 
 
 was. 
 
 316. Sec. 21-27. 
 
 1. They sent men 7 to find out how the sick were. 8 
 
 2. Xenophon bade them distribute these villages by lot. 
 
 1 who . . . us : what was the direct question? To whom does us refer? 
 2 in . . .faces : Ivavrios. 3 H. 737: G. 1097: B. 356: Go. 510. 4 Whoever 
 . . . have = those not having : which negative? 5 lost . . . eyes = were de- 
 stroyed in respect to the eyes. 6 on . . . steaming: cf. 8td TO 
 sec. 15 of the text. 7 Omit. 8 What tense in Greek? 
 
128 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART II 
 
 3. The husband of the mayor's daughter had gone to 
 
 hunt hares. 
 
 4. They had to l go down to their houses on a ladder. 
 
 317. Sec. 28-36. 
 
 1. We will deprive 2 him of his children until he prom- 
 
 ises to lead us. 
 
 2. Whenever Xenophon went by a house, they drank to 
 
 his health. 
 
 3. We asked him what the neighboring 3 country was. 
 
 4. Then the mayor taught us how to lead these horses 
 
 through deep snow. 
 
 BOOK IV CHAPTER VI 
 
 318. Sec. 1-9. 
 
 1. If you lead us well, we shall hand over to you your son. 
 
 2. The boy who was left behind 4 by the mayor was carried 
 
 home. 
 
 3. I will stop advancing in order that we may plan how 
 
 we shall fight. 6 
 
 4. As soon as they arm themselves, they will not delay. 
 
 319. Sec. 10-16. 
 
 1. We must consider how to seize the mountain without 
 
 being seen. 6 
 
 2. If the enemy are on both sides, 7 we shall be struck on 
 
 the head. 
 
 1 had to : use 8^w. 2 What two constructions follow verbs of depriving? 
 H. 724, 748: G. 1069, 1118: B. 340, 362: Go. 509. 8 ir\T|<rCov. 4 who . . 
 behind: see 40. 5 how . . .fight: H. 885: G. 1372: B. 593: Go. 638, *. 
 6 without being seen : use the participle of \av0dvw. 7 on both sides : V0V 
 KCU ev6cv. 
 
ANABASIS BOOK IV, CHAPS. IV-VI 129 
 
 3. I heard that you stole whatever the law did not l pro- 
 
 hibit. 
 
 4. I, also, am clever at stealing. 2 
 
 320. Sec. 17-27. 
 
 1. If we ever take any part of the mountain, they form 
 
 ambuscades. 
 
 2. Why must you make this agreement ? 3 
 
 3. The majority 4 joined the others before the enemy fled. 
 
 4. We could not render their shields 5 useless by cutting 
 
 them with our knives. 
 
 REVIEW OF CHAPTERS IV, V, AND VI 
 
 321. Learn the following important words which occur 
 in Chapters IV, V, and VI. Memorize the principal parts 
 of the verbs, and, where indicated, notice the difference 
 between the active and middle meanings. 
 
 1. cryvoc'co n. 
 
 2. dOpoos 12. 6iacrKT|Va) 
 
 3. d|i\ia 13. 8ia<j>pa> 
 
 4. cnravTaco 14. 5id<|>opos 
 
 5. a/ira| 15. eyKaXvirTco 
 
 6. airXcros 16. |nri|nrpti|u 
 
 7. dcr6Va> 17. v8a 
 
 8. pp'x<o 1 8. pdco 
 
 9. \ajJLa> 19. -u^vos 
 
 IO. 8oLKTt)\OS 2O. KdfJLVCO 
 
 1 All negative relative clauses which are protases of condition use |i/fj. 
 
 * at stealing : H. 952: G. 1526: B. 641: Go. 565, a. 8 onuv6t]|xa. 4 ol 
 iroXXoC. 5 Not -y^ppov; wicker shields. 
 
 GK. P..OSE COMP. 9 
 
130 
 
 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART II 
 
 27. 
 
 28. 
 
 29. |iTp0) 
 
 30. vdjjios 
 
 31. VO[U|IOS 
 
 32. SKVOS 
 
 33- 
 
 34. 6x|/ 
 
 35. iraiSaia 
 
 36. irdXai 
 
 37. iraXaids 
 
 38. 
 
 45- 
 46. 
 
 47. Tpira> 
 
 48. Tp<|)(0 
 
 49. dva,Tp<|>a> 
 
 50. 
 
 2 1 . KXeirro 
 
 22. icX(ox|/ 
 
 23. KXOTTTJ 
 
 24. KpaTTJp 
 
 25. KTTJVOS 
 
 26. KV<()as 
 
 39. 
 40. 
 41. 
 
 42. irpomvco 
 
 43. ircojjLa 
 
 44. -JTOJp 
 
 322. Review the following points of syntax : 
 
 1. 8id with Accusative and Genitive. 
 
 2. Case governed by 8co. 
 
 3. IITJ with the participle. [H. 1025,0:0. 1612: 6.653,6: 
 Go. 582, c.] 
 
 4. Vivid future condition. 
 
 5. Construction used with |iTaSiSo>|u. [11.737: 0.1097: 
 B. 356: Go. 510.] 
 
 6. Constructions used after verbs of Depriving. [H. 724, 
 
 748: G. 1069, n 18: B. 340, 362: Go. 509.] 
 
 7. OTTODS with the Future Indicative. When used ? 
 [H. 885: G. 1372: B. 593: Go. 638, a.-] 
 
 8. Adjectives followed by the Infinitive. [H. 952: G. 1526: 
 
 B. 641 : Go. 565, a.~\ 
 
 9. Present General Condition. 
 
 323. Let the instructor form several sentences, employ- 
 ing the words in 321 and involving the constructions in 
 322. These sentences should be written by the students 
 at sight. 
 
ANABASIS BOOK IV, CHAP. VII 131 
 
 BOOK IV CHAPTER VII 
 
 324. Sec. 1-8. 
 
 1. Immediately, on his arrival, 1 Xenophon said, "What 
 
 prevents us from taking 2 the place ? " 
 
 2. Whenever we pass by, our legs are crushed. 3 
 
 3. Should we not 4 suffer, while under fire? 5 
 
 4. It will not be possible to run along one by one. 
 
 325. Sec. 9-17. 
 
 1. The whole army. feared that he would be the first to 
 
 run 6 into the stronghold. 
 
 2. He seized him by the hand 7 as he ran by. 
 
 3. We shall cut off the heads of whomever we can 
 
 conquer. 
 
 4. Whenever we are going to fight, 8 they follow. 
 
 326. Sec. 18-27. 
 
 1. It is plain that 9 this guide came with us to destroy the 
 
 country. 
 
 2. The shouting of those who were coming up became 
 
 louder and nearer. 
 
 3. We heard the men ahead shouting, "The sea, the sea!" 
 
 4. Without the exhortation of any one, 10 the guide himself 
 
 cuts the shields. 
 
 1 on his arrival = having come. 2 What . . . taking: see text, sec. 4. 
 3 our . . . crushed '= we are crushed in respect to our legs. 4 H. 1015, b\ G. 
 1604 : B. 573. 5 while under fire = being struck. 6 be the Jirst to run : use 
 irpwTOS in agreement with the subject. 7 by the hand : H. 738, a : G. 1 100 : 
 B. 356 : Go. 510. 8 The Future Infinitive very often follows ji\\w. 9 When 
 SfjXos is used impersonally, it is followed by <Jn and the Indicative or Opta- 
 tive. 10 without . . . any one = no one exhorting : Genitive absolute. 
 
132 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART II 
 
 BOOK IV CHAPTER VIII 
 
 327. Sec. i-io. 
 
 1. A man who had been a slave 1 at Athens said, "I should 
 
 like to ask a question." * 
 
 2. We have not come to do harm to the king at least. 
 
 3. The Macrones said that they would give the Greeks a 
 
 spear. 
 
 4. We must come together and plan how to fight in the 
 
 best way. 
 
 328. Sec. 11-19. 
 
 1. If we go arranged in this way, the enemy will fall upon 
 
 our phalanx. 
 
 2. There is nothing to hinder 3 us from forming 4 the 
 
 companies in column. 
 
 3. If the companies are on both sides, 5 we shall not be cut 
 
 off by the enemy. 
 
 4. The right wing, which Cleanor led, began to sing the 
 
 paean. 
 
 329. Sec. 20-28. 
 
 1. As many as eat of the honeycomb will become foolish. 6 
 
 2. When a boy, he once killed a boy by striking him with 
 
 a dagger. 
 
 3. "This hill," he said, "will be a very excellent place for 
 
 wrestling." 
 
 4. The horsemen had to turn back at 7 the sea. 
 
 1 who . . . slave : see 40. 2 ask a question = ask something. 3 nothing 
 to hinder : cf. the text, sec. 14. 4 hinder . . . forming : H. 961, 1029: G. 
 1551 : B. 643: Go. 572-573. 8 on both sides : ev8v Kal v6v. 6 as many 
 . . .foolish : what kind of a condition? 7 4v. 
 
ANABASIS BOOK IV, CHAPS. VII-VIII 
 
 133 
 
 REVIEW OF CHAPTERS VII AND VIII 
 
 330. Learn the following important words which occur 
 in Chapters VII and VIII. Memorize the principal parts 
 of the verbs, and, where indicated, notice the difference 
 between the active and middle meanings. 
 
 1. d\Kl|JLOS 
 
 2. d video 
 3. 
 
 4. 
 
 5. dvaXuricco 
 
 6. 
 
 7. 
 
 8. Sacrus 
 
 9. 
 10. 
 
 1 1 . Sp|ia 
 12. 
 
 13. Sicunraco 
 14. 
 15. 
 
 1 6. craipos 
 
 1 7. 
 18. 
 19. T| 
 
 2O. 
 
 21. 
 
 22. Ocajxa 
 
 23. KoXcOVOS 
 
 24. K\)XivSa> 
 
 25. 
 
 26. 
 27. 
 
 28. opico 
 
 29. opiov 
 
 30. opos 
 31. 
 
 32. 
 
 33. TTCptTTOS 
 
 34. 
 35. 
 
 36. 1TL^0) 
 
 37. iraXaico 
 
 38. irdXi] 
 
 39. TTDYR 
 
 40. 1TTpv| 
 
 41. plTTTd) 
 
 42. <TKUTJ 
 43. 
 
 44. 
 
 45. <J>6Lpa> 
 
 46. 
 
 47. 
 
 48. 
 
 49. (OfJLOS 
 
 50. 
 
134 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART II 
 
 331. Review the following points of syntax : 
 
 1. The Accusative of specification. [H. 718: G. 1058: B. 
 337 ' Go. 537.] 
 
 2. Direct Questions. PH. 1015: G. 1603, 1604: B. 570-572: Go. 
 488.] 
 
 3. Verbs followed by the Genitive. [H. 738," #: G, iioo: 
 B. 356: Go. 510, 511.] 
 
 4. Vivid Future Relative Conditions, 114 and 115. 
 
 5. StjXos 411 used impersonally, 143. 
 
 6. Construction after verbs of Hindering, etc. [11.963: 
 G. 1549: B. 643: Go. 572-573.] 
 
 7. Redundant Negative. [H. 1029: G. 1615 : B. 434: Go. 487.] 
 
 332. Let the instructor form several sentences, employ- 
 ing the words in 330 and involving the constructions in 
 331. These sentences should be written by the students 
 at sight. 
 
PART III 
 
 BOOK I CHAPTER I 
 
 333. Sec. 1-2. 
 
 When Darius was sick, the elder of his two sons was 
 with him ; l but the younger 2 was, by chance, 3 in the prov- 
 ince of which Darius had made him satrap. Accordingly 
 the king sent for him, and he marched inland with three 
 hundred heavy armed Greek soldiers. 
 
 334. Sec. 3-6. 
 
 On the death of Darius, 4 Artaxerxes, his elder son, 
 ascended the throne, and arrested his brother, Cyrus, on 
 the ground that 6 he was plotting against him. Cyrus, 
 however, was begged off by his mother and sent back to 
 his province. There he planned to make war on his 
 brother, 6 and he treated all who were with him 7 in such 
 a way that they were well disposed toward him. 8 
 
 335. Sec. 7-8. 
 
 Cyrus secretly 9 plotted against his brother in the follow- 
 ing way: He took the fugitives of Miletus under his protec- 
 
 1 was with hint : irdpcifu. 2 With what word is this contrasted ? The 
 use of jUv and 8^ indicates the contrast. 3 was by chance = chanced to be ; 
 see 169. 4 On . . . Darius = when Darius died. 5 on the ground that : o>s 
 6 Dative. 7 with him : irop* cavrcp. 8 such . . . him : see 157 and 158. 
 9 See 169 
 
 135 
 
136 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART III 
 
 tion, and besieged 1 the city both by land and sea, in order 
 that he might find many pretexts 2 for collecting troops. 
 
 836. Sec. 9-1 1. 
 
 So 3 the king did not notice that Cyrus was plotting 4 
 against him, because he thought that he was at war with 
 Tissaphernes, and because he sent to him the taxes that 
 accrued 6 from the cities. Cyrus also gave to Clearchus, 
 who was his guest, ten thousand darics for the support of 
 his soldiers. In this way an army was maintained with- 
 out attracting attention. 6 
 
 BOOK I CHAPTER II 
 
 337. Sec. 1-4. 
 
 The Greek generals obeyed the call of Cyrus, 7 because 
 he promised that he would not stop until they should 
 arrive 8 among the Pisidians. Therefore they assembled 
 as many soldiers as they could. When Tissaphernes, 
 however, perceived this preparation, he went to the king 
 as quickly as he could in order that he might make 
 preparations in turn. 9 
 
 338. Sec. 5-9. 
 
 On setting out 10 from Sardis, Cyrus marched to the 
 large city of Celaenae. 11 Whenever the king was in the 
 
 1 took . . . and besieged = having taken, besieged. 2 See the text at the 
 end of sec. 7. 8 &TT. 4 that . . .plotting: H. 982: G. 1588: B. 661 : Go. 
 586. 5 that accrued: see 40. accrued: < yi < yvo|iai. 6 without .. .atten- 
 tion : see 169. 7 the call of Cyrus Cyrus* calling. 8 until . . . arrive : 
 see 128. 9 in turn : what preposition expresses this idea? 10 On setting 
 out: do not follow this use of the present participle in English. The Greeks 
 were more accurate in their use of the tenses than the English are. Did he 
 set out before he marched ? n Do not use the Genitive. 
 
ANABASIS BOOK I, CHAP. II 137 
 
 park of this city, he used to hunt wild beasts on horse- 
 back. 1 The Marsyas river, which empties into the Maean- 
 der, is twenty feet 2 wide. 3 There Xerxes, after his defeat 
 in Greece, was said to have built a palace at the sources of 
 the river. 
 
 339. Sec. 10-14. 
 
 When he was at Cayster-plain, the soldiers kept coming 
 to Cyrus to demand 4 the pay which was due them 5 ; but 
 Cyrus was evidently 6 troubled because he had no money 
 to give them. The Cilician queen, however, 7 at that time, 
 gave Cyrus a large amount of money in order that he 
 might pay the army. When Cyrus reached Tyriaeum, he 
 remained ten days. 
 
 340. Sec. 15-18. 
 
 At the request of the Cilician queen, 8 Cyrus reviewed 
 his whole 9 army. As the Greeks were marching past, 
 Cyrus ordered them to advance arms 10 ; and when the 
 trumpet sounded, they advanced arms and moved for- 
 ward on the run toward the barbarians. On this account, 
 the barbarians were greatly alarmed, and Epyaxa herself 
 fled in her carriage. 
 
 341. Sec. 19-22. 
 
 While they were marching through Cappadocia, Cyrus 
 was said to have killed a man. Syennesis, the king of 
 
 1 on horseback = from horse. 2 Genitive of measure. 8 in width. 4 to 
 demand : review the ways of expressing purpose. See 79. 5 which . . . them : 
 this idea is expressed by dird in composition with the verb meaning to demand. 
 6 See 143. 7 8 8 At . . . queen : use the Genitive absolute. 9 H. 672 : 
 G. 979 : B. 455. 10 advance arms : irpo(3dXX.o}icu TO. oirXa. 
 
138 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART III 
 
 Cilicia, tried to prevent Cyrus from entering 1 his country 
 by guarding 2 the pass over the mountains. But when a 
 messenger came and said that Menon was already inside 
 of the mountains, the king abandoned the pass, and Cyrus 
 proceeded without hindrance. 3 
 
 342. Sec. 23-27. 
 
 Some 4 say that these soldiers perished among the moun- 
 tains at the hands of 5 the Cilicians, while others 4 say that 
 they could not find the road. Afterwards, 6 when Cyrus 
 had entered Tarsus and met Syennesis, he gave him many 
 valuable gifts, while 7 he, on the other hand, 8 gave Cyrus 
 a large sum of money. The Greeks said that they would 
 not take the slaves, if they ever came across any. 9 
 
 REVIEW OF CHAPTERS I AND II 
 
 343. Follow the directions given in 182-184. 
 The sight work should be connected prose. 
 
 BOOK I CHAPTER III 
 
 344. Sec. 1-6. 
 
 Cyrus was compelled to remain here many days, 10 for 
 his soldiers would not go against the king. When Clear- 
 chus could not force his soldiers to advance, he addressed 
 them as follows: " Fellow-soldiers, do not wonder 11 that 
 I wish to aid Cyrus for the benefits I have received at his 
 
 1 from entering: 1^.963: G. 1549: B. 643: Go. 572, 573. 2 by guard- 
 ing : use the participle. 8 without hindrance = no one hindering. 4 some 
 . . . others : ol piv . . . ol 8. 6 at the hands of: Genitive with vird. 6 After 
 this. 1 SI. 8 on . . . hand : omit. 9 if. . . any : see 111 and 149. 10 many days : 
 what kind of time is expressed? u do . . . wonder : for prohibitions, see 62. 
 
ANABASIS BOOK I, CHAP. Ill 139 
 
 hands. 1 On the other hand, I do not wish to desert you, 
 for I know that, if I should be deprived 2 of you, I should 
 not be able to ward off an enemy." 
 
 345. Sec. 7-12. 
 
 The soldiers commended the decision 3 of Clearchus 
 when he said that he would not desert them. On account 
 of this, Cyrus thought that he had been wronged 4 by the 
 Greeks, and, accordingly, they feared that 5 he would 
 inflict punishment on them. Clearchus told them that 
 Cyrus was a very bitter enemy, as well as 6 a valuable 
 friend. 
 
 346. Sec. 13-16. 
 
 " I propose," said one of the soldiers, " that we sail 
 away, 7 if Cyrus will give us boats. But if not, 8 let us 
 ask him for guides so that we may seize the heights before 
 the Cilicians." 9 After him, Clearchus stood up and said 
 that he knew how to be ruled also, 10 and that he would 
 obey whatever man they chose to be general. 11 
 
 347. Sec. 17-21. 
 
 The Greeks did not think it best 12 to ask Cyrus for 
 boats, 13 for they would hesitate 14 to embark in the boats 
 which he might give. " We will send messengers," they 
 
 1 for . . . hands : see text, last part of sec. 4. 2 if... deprived : H. 969, d: 
 G. 1563, 5 : B. 653, 6: Go. 583. 3 yv&\Lr\. 4 had been wronged: the direct 
 form of the thought was I have been wronged. 6 H. 887: G. 1378: B. 594: 
 Go. 6 10, 611. 6 as well as : r\ icaC. 7 propose . . . away : ctirov followed by 
 the Infinitive. 8 See 96. 9 seize . . . Cilicians : see 169. 10 icat before 
 the word it emphasizes. n would . . .general: what was the direct form of 
 the condition? 12 think it best: 8oK&> and Dative. 13 for boats: H. 724: 
 G. 1069: B. 340: Go. 535. 14 Notice the two meanings of OKVO> as given in 
 the vocabulary, and the construction used in each case. 
 
I4O GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART III 
 
 said, "to ask him if this expedition is more dangerous 
 than the former one." Cyrus replied to the delegates 
 that he wished to inflict punishment on Abrocomas, a per- 
 sonal enemy of his, who was l at the Euphrates river. 
 
 BOOK I CHAPTER IV 
 
 348. Sec. 1-5. 
 
 While Cyrus was staying at Issus, thirty-five ships that 
 he had sent for arrived. From there they march for 
 one day to the pass from Cilicia into Syria. 2 By landing 3 
 troops inside and outside the walls, Cyrus overpowered 
 the enemy and took the pass. When Abrocomas heard 
 that Cyrus was coming 4 against him, he retreated to the 
 king. 
 
 349. Sec. 6-10. 
 
 At Myriandus, two generals placed their most valuable 5 
 goods on a boat, and sailed away. Some 6 expressed the 
 wish that Cyrus would capture them, while 6 others thought 
 that he would not pursue them. Cyrus said to his troops, 
 " I, at least, 7 will not capture their boat, lest some one 
 might say that I rob 8 of their property whoever wishes to 
 go away." 
 
 350. Sec. 1 1-14. 
 
 After this episode, 9 Cyrus marched on to the Euphrates 
 river, which was 10 twenty-four plethra wide. When the 
 soldiers heard that the march would be to Babylon, they 
 
 1 who was : see 40. 2 from . . . Syria = of Cilicia and Syria. 8 By 
 landing: H. 969, a: G. 1563, 3: B. 653, 2: Go. 583. 4 was coming: see 
 142. 5 most valuable : irXcCcrrov o|ia. 6 Some . . . while others : ol plv . . . 
 ol 8 7 7, at least : tyuyt. 8 H. 724 : G. 1069 : B. 340 : Go. 535. 9 Omit. 
 10 which was : do not use a relative clause. 
 
ANABASIS BOOK I, CHAP. V 14! 
 
 said that they would not go. 1 Cyrus, however, persuaded 
 the greater part of the Greek army to follow, by promising 
 to give to each man a large amount of money until they 
 reached 2 Babylon. 
 
 351. Sec. 15-19. 
 
 Menon wished to persuade his men to cross the river 
 before 3 the rest of the soldiers decided what they would 
 do. "For," said he, "if you begin to cross, Cyrus will 
 honor you above the rest." Cyrus was pleased with 
 Menon and his soldiers, 4 and he said that he would take 
 care 5 that 6 they praise him. It is said that this river 
 receded before Cyrus. 
 
 REVIEW OF CHAPTERS III AND IV 
 
 352. Follow the directions given in 195-197. 
 The sight work should be connected prose. 
 
 BOOK I CHAPTER V 
 
 353. Sec. 1-4. 
 
 While they were marching through Arabia, they hunted 
 wild animals of all sorts on horseback. Whenever they 
 gave chase 7 to the wild asses, these ran so much faster 8 
 than the horses that they could not capture them. After 
 they remained at Corsote for three days, they marched to 
 Pylae, keeping 9 the Euphrates on their right. 
 
 1 they . . . go : the Greek expression is did not say that they would go. 
 2 until . . . reached : what was the form of the promise in Cyrus' words? See 
 128. 3 irpiv: see 128. 4 Do not use the word for soldier at all. Express 
 in another way. 5 take care : this verb is impersonal in Greek. 6 H. 885 : 
 G. 1372: B. 593: Go. 638, a. 1 whenever . . . chase : see 109. 8 so much 
 faster = faster by so much. 9 having. 
 
142 GREE^ PROSE COMPOSITION PART III 
 
 354. Sec. 5- 
 
 Here the soldiers ate meat, because grain was very 
 scarce. On one \ccasion, 1 when a narrow place ap- 
 peared, 2 one coukr see 3 a sample 4 of Cyrus' discipline. 
 At the comtnand of Cyrus, 6 his noblest attendants 
 strrppecf ^ff their tunics, jumped into the mud, and 
 helped hasten on the wagons. 
 
 355. Sec. 9-11. 
 
 Cyrus did not delay, except 6 where it was necessary to 
 provide himself with provisions, for he evidently 7 wished 
 to fight the king when he was 8 unprepared. Besides, 9 
 Cyrus knew that the king's country was weak in the 
 scattered condition of his troops. 10 The soldiers obtained 
 provisions from a city named Charmande by crossing the 
 river on skins. ^ 
 
 /> 356. Sec. 12-17. 
 
 One of Menon's soldiers said that he had been beaten 
 by Clearchus; therefore, on the same 11 day, when Clear- 
 chus was riding by, 12 they threw stones at him. When 
 Cyrus learned of the affair, he rode between the two 
 armies, and told the Greeks that, if they engaged in any 
 conflict with one another, they would be 13 cut to pieces by 
 the barbarians. 
 
 1 On . . . occasion: ITOT& 2 when . . . appeared : Genitive absolute. 8 one 
 could see it was possible to see. 4 |ilpos, r6. 6 At . . . Cyrus : Genitive 
 absolute. 6 except where : oirov JJL^. 7 See 143. 8 Omit when he was. 
 9 CTI. 10 in . . . troops : notice the text at the end of sec. 9. n See 46. 
 12 when . . . by : use participle. 18 if. . . be: Cyrus said, if you engage . . 
 you will be t etc. 
 
ANABASIS BOOK I, CHAP. VII 143 
 
 BOOK 1 CHAPTER VI 
 , 357. Sec. 1-5. 
 
 Orontas, a man who had formerly been at war 1 with 
 Cyrus, said to him, " If you give me a thousand horsemen, 
 I will kill these horsemen, and prevent them from 2 carry- 
 ing the news 3 to the king." But Orontas was planning 
 to go to the king. When Cyrus heard of this, he arrested 
 Orontas. 
 
 358. Sec. 6-1 1. 
 
 At the trial, Orontas said that he had never been 
 wronged by Cyrus. Cyrus then said, " Did you not 4 
 revolt to the Mysians after you gave 5 me pledges?" 
 Orontas assented. When Clearchus advised that they 
 put him out of the way as quickly as possible, all the 
 rest assented to this opinion. After this, no one ever saw 
 Orontas either dead or alive. 
 
 REVIEW OF CHAPTERS V AND VI 
 
 359. Follow the directions given in 205-207. 
 The sight work should be connected prose. 
 
 BOOK I CHAPTER VII 
 
 360. Sec. 1-5. 
 
 After Cyrus had reviewed 6 the whole army, he collected 
 the general and captains of the Greeks, and told them that 
 he led them as allies because he thought 7 that they were 
 
 1 a . . . war : see 40. 2 H. 963 : G. 1549 : B. 643 : Go. 572, 573. 3 car- 
 rying the news : express by one verb. 4 Did you not : OUKOVV. Like nonne 
 in Latin. 5 after you gave : Aorist participle. 6 made a review. 7 because 
 H. 969, b\ G. 1563, 2: B. 653, 4: Go. 583. 
 
144 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART III 
 
 braver than the barbarians. He showed them into what 
 sort of a contest they were going, and said he would make 
 them the envy of their friends at home, if his enterprise 
 was successful. 1 
 
 361. Sec. 6-1 1. 
 
 Gaulites, who happened to be present, said that Cyrus 
 would not be able to fulfill his promises, 2 even if he should 
 remember 3 them. When the Greeks asked Cyrus what 
 they should have, 4 if they conquered, he said that he 
 would give to each man a golden crown. Artagerses was 
 said to be the leader of the king's horsemen. 
 
 362. Sec. 12-20. 
 
 Cyrus thought that the king would not fight on that 
 day, because he learned that many tracks of men, who 
 were retreating, were visible. Ten days before this, 5 Sila- 
 nus said that the king would not fight within ten days, so 
 Cyrus promised him a large amount of 6 money in case he 
 should prove to speak 7 the truth. 
 
 BOOK I CHAPTER VIII 
 
 363. Sec. 1-7. 
 
 While all were proceeding rather carelessly, Pategyas 
 rode up at full speed and shouted that the king would 
 immediately attack .them with a large army. Thereupon 
 the generals and soldiers armed themselves in all haste, 
 
 1 if. . . successful : use the Genitive absolute. See text at end of sec. 4. 
 2 his promises = as many things as he promised. 3 Notice that the Perfect 
 middle of [ii}j.vT|crKa> has a present meaning. 4 what they should have = what 
 should be to them : Dative of possession. 6 Ten . . . this on the eleventh day 
 from that day. 6 large amount of: iroXXd. 7 in . . . truth : what was the 
 promise in the direct form? prove to speak : Aorist. 
 
ANABASIS BOOK I, CHAP. VIII 145 
 
 and took 1 their positions, 2 each in his appointed place. 
 Clearchus occupied 3 the right wing, near 4 the Euphrates 
 river. 
 
 364. Sec. 8-13. 
 
 In the afternoon, the whole Persian army came into 
 sight. In front of the lines the Greeks saw some chariots 
 that had scythes for the purpose of cutting whomever they 
 came in contact with. 5 Although Clearchus was ordered 6 
 to lead against the center of the enemy, yet he did not 
 obey, because he feared 7 that he would be cut off from 
 the river. 
 
 365. Sec. 14-21. 
 
 When Cyrus heard from Xenophon 8 what the watch- 
 word was, 9 the Greeks sang the paean, and went against 
 the enemy. But the barbarians were frightened out of 
 their wits, and fled before they suffered any injury. 
 Whenever 10 the chariots were borne through the Greeks, 
 they opened ranks. 
 
 366. Sec. 22-29. 
 
 Cyrus, fearing that the king would surround him and 
 cut his men to pieces, rode against the men in front of the 
 king. There Cyrus received a wound under the eye and 
 was killed. This defeat occurred n because Cyrus did not 
 restrain himself, 12 and because Clearchus did not himself 
 lead against the king. 
 
 1 armed . . . and took = having armed . . . took. 2 took their positions : 
 KaOio-TTjiu. 3 held. 4 Dative with irpos- 5 came . . . with : vTvyx<* vw - 
 6 Although . . . ordered: H. 969, e\ G. 1563, 6: B. 653, 7: Go. 583. 7 be- 
 cause he feared : participle. 8 Genitive of source. 9 The direct question 
 was What is, etc. 10 See 109. n -yC-yvoiJiat. 12 restrain himself: 
 
 GK. PROSE COMP. IO 
 
146 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART III 
 
 REVIEW OF CHAPTERS VII AND VIII 
 
 367. Follow the instructions given in 217-219. 
 The sight work should be connected prose. 
 
 BOOK I CHAPTER IX 
 
 368. Sec. 1-7. 
 
 Cyrus was educated at the king's court, with the sons of 
 the nobles. There, all who were personally acquainted 1 
 with him agreed that he was the best of all in everything, 
 and that he knew how to 2 rule and obey. While he was 
 satrap of Lydia and Phrygia, everybody had confidence in 
 him, because he never broke his word, 3 if he promised any 
 one anything. 
 
 369. Sec. 8-15. 
 
 Cyrus evidently 4 showed that he would not betray the 
 fugitives of Miletus, therefore very many cities prayed 
 that they might intrust even 5 their lives to him. Now, 6 
 he always had a large supply of brave men, for wherever 7 
 Cyrus appeared, very many were willing to incur danger 
 and go on expeditions with him. 
 
 370. Sec. 16-23. 
 
 He regarded it of the utmost importance 8 to take 
 nothing away from those who brought in 9 large revenues 
 from the countries which 10 , they ruled. Furthermore, 11 
 
 1 were . . . acquainted: \v ireCpa ytyvoiicu. 2 knew how to: H. 986: G. 
 1592, 2 : B. 661, n. 3 : Go. 588, c. 8 broke his word: \(/6v8o|xai. 4 See 143. 
 6 Kal. What position? 6 8-fj. 7 See 109. 8 regarded . . . importance : 
 irplir\urTOv iroic'w. 9 brought in : irotw. 10 See 37. n CTU 
 
ANABASIS BOOK I, CHAP. X 147 
 
 whatever gifts he received he distributed among his 
 friends, and he was a most excellent co-worker with 
 them in whatever they wished to accomplish. 
 
 371. Sec. 24-31. 
 
 I, at least, think 1 that it is remarkable that he looked 
 after his friends so carefully. 2 For this reason he had 
 very many true friends. Even all the nobles who were 
 with him in battle were killed while fighting in his behalf. 
 Such a man, .then, 3 was Cyrus the Younger. 
 
 BOOK I CHAPTER X 
 
 372. Sec. 1-6. 
 
 After the battle, the king's soldiers plundered 4 the camp 
 of Cyrus and fell upon the camp of the Greeks, where all 
 who chanced to have arms made a stand. The Greeks, 
 on the other hand, 6 conquered their opponents and went 6 
 ahead in pursuit. 
 
 373. Sec. 7-1 1. 
 
 Now 7 Tissaphernes had the worst of it 8 in the first 
 encounter, for the Greeks, under the command of Epis- 
 thenes, 9 opened up their ranks and shot at him as he was 
 charging through. When the Greeks saw that the king 
 was coming up from the rear, they wheeled about and 
 attacked him. 
 
 1 / . . . think : SOK&O used impersonally and Dative. 2 so . . . carefully : 
 OUTCOS 3 S^j . 4 plundered . . . and fell ' = having plundered . . .fell. 5 on 
 . . . hand: dXXd. 6 els TO irpo<r0v. 7 8rfj. 8 had . . . it: see the text at 
 the beginning of sec. 8. 9 under . . . Episthenes : Genitive absolute. 
 
148 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART III 
 
 374. Sec. 12-19. 
 
 The Persians, however, fled in different 1 directions when 
 they saw that the Greeks were advancing. After this 
 encounter, the Greeks halted at the foot of a certain hill, 
 and wondered whether Cyrus was dead or 2 had gone in 
 pursuit. After deliberation, they decided to go to their 
 camp, where they found that everything had been plun- 
 dered. 
 
 REVIEW OF CHAPTERS IX AND X 
 
 375. Follow the directions given in 228-230. 
 The sight work should be connected prose. 
 
 BOOK II CHAPTER I 
 
 376. Sec. 1-5. 
 
 The Greeks were grieved when they heard from Procles 
 that Cyrus was dead, and that Ariaeus would go away 
 towards 3 Ionia on the next day. Clearchus said, "Would 
 that Cyrus had not been killed. 4 If he were alive, we 
 would put him on the throne, 5 for victors have the privi- 
 lege of ruling." 6 
 
 377. Sec. 6-10. 
 
 After this, the Greeks went ahead and ate the flesh of 
 some 7 oxen, using the arrows of the enemy for fuel. 8 
 While Clearchus was sacrificing, a herald from the king 
 
 1 in different directions : aXXoi aXXoOcv. 2 ir6rpov . . . rj. 8 &irC with 
 the Genitive. * Would . . . killed ' : express this in two ways. See 72. 5 If 
 . . . throne : see 95. 6 victors . . . ruling : see the text at the end of sec. 4. 
 7 This may be omitted or expressed. 8 In apposition with arrows. What 
 case? 
 
ANABASIS BOOK TI, CHAP. II 149 
 
 came and told the Greeks to surrender their arms. 
 Proxenus replied, "Well, 1 if the king has conquered us, 
 let him come and take 2 our arms, or tell us what we shall 
 have, if we obey him." 
 
 378. Sec. 11-16. 
 
 In reply to 3 these words, 4 the herald, whose name was 
 Phalinus, 5 said that the Greeks belonged to the king, 
 because he could lead against them a large number of 
 troops, and that they were foolish, if they thought they 
 could use their valor and conquer the king. Therefore 
 many of the Greeks began to lose 6 courage. 
 
 379. Sec. 17-23. 
 
 Clearchus, wishing that Phalinus would advise them not 
 to surrender their arms, said, " Tell us, Phalinus, what we 
 ought to do." But he replied that they did not have one 
 hope in ten thousand of saving themselves without the 
 consent of the king. 7 Clearchus, however, said that they 
 would not surrender their arms, for they would be more 
 valuable 8 friends with them than without 9 them. 
 
 BOOK II CHAPTER II 
 
 380. Sec. 1-6. 
 
 . Ariaeus urged the Greeks to go back home with him 
 on the next day. After he had sacrificed, Clearchus said 
 
 1 d\\d. 2 let . . . take = having come. Jet him take : see 60. 8 In reply 
 to : irpos with the Accusative. 4 Omit. 6 whose . . . Phalinus = Phalinus 
 in respect to name. 6 began to lose : Imperfect. 7 without . . . king: Geni- 
 tive absolute. 8 more valuable : irXeCovos oioi. 9 with . . . without = 
 having them than not having them : H. 969, d: G. 1563, 5 : B. 653: Go. 583. 
 What is the negative in conditions? 
 
ISO GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART III 
 
 to the generals, " The omens are not favorable for us 
 to go to the king, and we cannot remain here, because 
 we have no provisions, therefore we must 1 go immedi- 
 ately to our friends." Henceforth the Greeks obeyed 
 Clearchus. 
 
 381. Sec. 7-13. 
 
 About midnight, Ariaeus and the Greeks came together 
 and took an oath that they would not 2 betray each other. 
 Ariaeus thought that they ought not to go back by the 
 road 3 they came, for fear that 4 they would not have pro- 
 visions. Therefore they decided to go by a longer route, 3 
 so that they might not perish from hunger. 
 
 382. Sec. 14-21. 
 
 The Greeks did not wish to attack these horsemen, but 
 they led straight on and arrived at sunset at villages, which 
 had been plundered 5 by the king's army. There the 
 Greeks made such a noise that the enemy actually fled 6 
 from their tents. Clearchus, however, was afraid that a 
 panic would fall upon the Greeks also 7 within that night. 
 
 REVIEW OF CHAPTERS I AND II 
 
 383. Follow the instructions given in 240-242. 
 The sight work should t be connected prose. 
 
 1 For the different ways of expressing must, see 74. 2 See 141. 8 by the 
 road; by a longer route : H. 715, b\ G. 1057: B. 331 : Go. 536. 4 for fear 
 that: jMf. 6 that . . . plundered: see 40. 6 that . . .fled : for the distinction 
 between WCTTC with the Indicative and with the Infinitive, see H. 927 : G. 
 1450: B. 595 : Go. 566, b t 639, a. 7 KCU. In what position? 
 
ANABASIS BOOK II, CHAP. Ill 151 
 
 BOOK II CHAPTER III 
 
 384. Sec. 1-9. 
 
 At sunrise, some heralds came to the pickets and asked 
 for Clearchus. He replied, " Wait until I am at leisure, 1 
 and tell them that we shall not talk about a truce unless 
 they furnish breakfast." The messengers said that they 
 would furnish the Greeks with provisions, in case there 
 was a truce. After consultation, the generals decided 2 
 not to hesitate to make the treaty. 
 
 385. Sec. 10- 1 6. 
 
 As they marched along, they came upon canals, over 
 which they had to build 3 bridges. Clearchus beat those who 
 loitered, in order that he might hurry on the work, for he 
 thought that the king was trying to hinder the Greeks by let- 
 ting 4 the water into the plain. In the villages, they found 
 dates of such wonderful flavor 6 that the soldiers ate them. 
 
 386. Sec. 17-22. 
 
 Tissaphernes said to the Greeks, through an interpreter, 
 that he would ask the king that they might be carried 
 safely 6 into Greece, "and I think/' said he, "that he will 
 grant me this as a favor, 7 because I was the first to report 
 that Cyrus was plotting against him." Clearchus replied 
 that they were ashamed to desert Cyrus, now that they 
 had marched inland 8 with him. 
 
 1 Wait . . . leisure : see 128. 2 Use SOK&O impersonally. 8 had to build : 
 see 74. 4 -by letting : participle. 5 wonderful flavor = wonderful because 
 of their flavor : H. 744, 753: G. 1126, 1140: B. 366: Go. 509, c. * be 
 carried safely : cnro<ra>a>. 7 grant as a favor : x,apio|iai. 8 now . . . in" 
 land : participle. 
 
152 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART III 
 
 387. Sec. 23-29. 
 
 The Greeks said that they did not wish to kill the king, 
 but would like l to proceed home. On the next day, 2 Tis- 
 saphernes came and said, "We will furnish you with 
 provisions, if you will give us pledges ; you will have to 
 swear further that you will buy food, whenever we cannot 
 provide a market. " 
 
 BOOK II CHAPTER IV 
 
 388. Sec. 1-6. 
 
 While the Greeks and Ariaeus were encamped near 
 each other, the Greeks were evidently 3 not pleased with 
 the soldiers 4 of Ariaeus. They said to their generals, 
 " Let us not wait here until we perish." Clearchus, how- 
 ever, replied that, if they should go away then, they would 
 have no provisions, nor would they be able to cross the 
 Euphrates. 
 
 389. Sec. 7-14. 
 
 " If the king," said Clearchus, " had desired to destroy 
 us, I do not think that he would have broken his oath." 
 After this, as Tissaphernes led them,^ the Greeks en- 
 camped by themselves, because the barbarians and the 
 Greeks suspected each other. As they passed through 
 the country, they arrived at a canal that was 6 fifteen para- 
 sangs long. 
 
 1 c0cXo>. 2 On . . . day : express in two ways. 8 See 143. * Do -not 
 use the word o-TpaTiwrrjs. 5 a s . . . them :, Genitive absolute. 6 that was : 
 see 40. 
 
ANABASIS BOOK II, CHAP. V 153 
 
 390. Sec. 15-22. 
 
 When Xenophon happened to be in front of the pickets, 
 a man came up and said that Ariaeus bade them send a 
 guard to the bridge, in order that the barbarians might 
 not destroy the bridges and attack them. Then, indeed, 1 
 the Greeks knew that he had been sent underhandedly, 2 
 for Tissaphernes could not flee if 3 the bridge was de- 
 stroyed. 
 
 391. Sec. 23-28. 
 
 When the Greeks learned what sort of 4 country there 
 was between the river and the canal, they were not fright- 
 ened, for they thought that the barbarians would not wish 
 them to destroy the bridge and remain. 
 
 At the river Physeus the Greeks met the illegitimate 
 brother of the king, who halted 5 his army as the Greeks 
 went by. He was astonished as he saw them. 
 
 REVIEW OF CHAPTERS III AND IV 
 
 392. Follow the directions given in 252-254. 
 The sight work should be connected prose. 
 
 BOOK II CHAPTER V 
 
 393. Sec. i-io. 
 
 When they reached the Zapatas river, Clearchus and 
 Tissaphernes had a conference. 6 Clearchus said, "We 
 
 1 Then, indeed: cv9a 8-fj. 2 sent underhandedly : vir6irjnrros. 8 Do 
 not use el. How else may a condition be expressed? 4 what sort of: for 
 the interrogative of quality, see 34. 5 Distinguish between the transitive and 
 intransitive meanings of the different tenses. 6 had a conference : ls Xo-yovs 
 px.o|Aai (Dative). 
 
154 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART III 
 
 must put a stop to these suspicious feelings before we 
 inflict incurable evils on each other. 1 The Greeks will 
 not violate their oaths, nor will they kill you, Tissa- 
 phernes, our greatest benefactor, for we should be fool- 
 ish if we should do so." 
 
 391 Sec. 11-17. 
 
 "Since you have both Cyrus' domain and the king's 
 troops, who is so foolish as not to desire to become your 
 ally 2 ? But we also, Tissaphernes, can help you in many 
 ways. If the Egyptians should trouble you, I think that 
 you could punish 3 them by using us as your allies. This 
 being so, 4 who has persuaded you that we distrust you ? " 
 
 395. Sec. 18-24. 
 
 Tissaphernes said in reply that the Greeks did not 
 justly distrust either him or the king; for they could 
 easily destroy the Greeks by seizing 5 the mountains before- 
 hand and burning the crops. He furthermore asserted 
 that he would be foolish if he should perjure himself, for 
 perjury was characteristic of 6 men in difficulty. "Who 
 are the ones," said he, "who 7 are trying to slander me? " 
 
 396. Sec. 25-33. 
 
 Clearchus urged the rest to go to Tissaphernes with 
 him, so that the slanderers might be detected and pun- 
 ished. He evidently 8 suspected that Menon was the one 
 
 1 on each other: H. 725, a: G. 1073: B. 340: Go. 534, a. 2 who . . . 
 ally ? see 159. 3 think . . . punish : if the Infinitive with av depends upon 
 otfiai, the av is placed near otjicu. 4 Genitive absolute; see text, sec. 12. 
 5 by seizing : participle. 6 characteristic of: see text, at beginning of sec. 21. 
 7 the ones who : see 40. 8 See 143. 
 
ANABASIS BOOK II, CHAP. VI 155 
 
 who was plotting against the Greeks. Although many of 
 the soldiers did not trust Tissaphernes, 1 nevertheless five 
 generals and twenty captains went with Clearchus. These 
 generals were arrested, and most of the captains were 
 killed. 
 
 397. Sec. 34-42. 
 
 After this, messengers from the king came and demanded 
 of the Greeks 2 their arms, on the ground that they were 
 his. 3 Cleanor said to Ariaeus that he was the basest of 
 men, because he had betrayed the very 4 men to whom he 
 had sworn to be a friend. Xenophon asked Ariaeus 2 for 
 Proxenus and Menon, because they were friendly to both 
 parties. 6 
 
 BOOK II CHAPTER VI 
 
 398. Sec. 1-5. 
 
 Of these generals who were captured and beheaded, 
 Clearchus was the most fond of war. While he was at 
 war with the Thracians, who were plundering the Greeks, 
 he did not obey the order of the Ephors 6 to come back. 
 Accordingly he was condemned to death. After this, he 
 collected an army with the money which Cyrus had given 
 him, and waged war against the Thracians until 7 Cyrus 
 sent for him. 
 
 399. Sec. 6-15. 
 
 I think that the man who spends money on war, when 
 he can choose peace, is very fond of danger. Further- 
 
 1 Although . . . Tissaphernes : Genitive absolute. 2 H. 724 : G. 1069 : 
 B. 340: Go. 535. 3 on . . . his = as being of himself. 4 avros. 5 Omit. 
 6 order . . . Ephors the Ephors ordering him. 7 See 128. 
 
156 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART III 
 
 more, 1 Clearchus used to punish his soldiers so severely 
 that they thought that they must obey 2 him. Whenever 
 they were out of danger, his soldiers went over to another 
 general, but when dangers came they repented, for their 
 fear of him 3 made them brave soldiers. 
 
 400. Sec. 16-20. 
 
 Proxenus was a just and honorable man, 4 but he was 
 not a good general, 4 because he could not impress on his 
 troops respect for himself. He thought, as it seemed, 5 
 that his -soldiers would obey him, if he did not praise the 
 disobedient. The soldiers used to fear Clearchus more 
 than they did Proxenus. At his death, Proxenus was 
 about thirty years old. 
 
 401. Sec. 21-30. 
 
 Menon 6 wished to become very rich and powerful. 
 Therefore he thought that he must commit perjury and 
 deceive his friends, in order to carry out 7 his desires. 8 
 He used to think that it was an easy matter to take the 
 possessions of his friends, because they would be off their 
 guard. He always used to fear those who he thought 
 were rascals. This base man was not beheaded as the 
 rest were, but was tortured to death. 
 
 REVIEW OF CHAPTERS V AND VI 
 
 402. Follow the instructions given in 264-266. 
 The sight work should be connected prose. 
 
 1 av. 2 must obey : H. 988-992: G. 1594-1599: B. 663-666: Go. 352-354. 
 8 their . . . him : use the article and the Infinitive. 4 just man ; good general: 
 show that these two expressions are contrasted. 6 as it seemed : see 143. 
 6 Notice in the text the use of 81 at the beginning of each of the character 
 sketches. 7 in . . . out: eirl r6 and the Infinitive. 8 Do not use a noun. 
 
ANABASIS BOOK III, CHAP. I 157 
 
 BOOK III CHAPTER I 
 
 403. Sec. 1-5. 
 
 After the death of the generals, the Greeks did not go to 
 sleep, for they thought that, inasmuch as they had no 
 cavalry, no one would be left, if they should prove victo- 
 rious. Now it happened that Xenophon, the Athenian, 
 was with the army at the invitation of Proxenus. 1 He 
 was a friend of Socrates, the philosopher, 2 who advised 
 him to consult the god at Delphi with reference to the 
 journey. 
 
 404. Sec. 6-13. 
 
 Xenophon decided that he ought to go with Proxenus, 
 so he asked Apollo to what gods he must sacrifice, if he 
 wished to get home safely. When he was introduced to 
 Cyrus, and was on his march inland, 3 he was ashamed to 
 go back, after he had discovered that Cyrus wished to con- 
 quer the king. During a thunderstorm, he thought that 
 he saw a vision. 
 
 405. Sec. 14-20. 
 
 For a long time he lay thinking what sort of dream it 
 was; then he called the captains of Proxenus together, 
 and said that he could not sleep when he saw that the 
 Greeks were not making preparations against the king. 
 "For," said he, "if we get into the hands 4 of the king 
 to-day, will he not resort to every means to kill 6 us ? I 
 
 1 at . . . Proxenus : express this idea by the use of the participle. 2 <j>i\6- 
 <ro<|>os. 3 on . . . inland : use one word. * = power. 6 to kill : s and 
 the Subjunctive or Optative. Which? 
 
158 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART III 
 
 fear the truce, because we must get all of our provisions 
 by purchase/' 
 
 406. Sec. 21-29. 
 
 "In this struggle," said he, "the gods, in all likelihood, 
 would be on our side ; let us therefore show : ourselves 
 very brave generals and captains. For my part, 2 I will 
 follow or lead, just as you choose." Apollonides, how- 
 ever, said he talked foolishness. Xenophon said in reply, 
 " Do you 3 not remember 1 that our generals were beaten by 
 the Persians? " 
 
 407. Sec. 30-35. 
 
 The decks accordingly took away the captaincy from 
 Apollonides, 4 because they saw that both of his ears had 
 been bored, 5 and because they thought he was a disgrace to 
 all Greece. Then Hieronumos urged Xenophon to tell the 
 others just what he had also told them. Xenophon replied 
 that they at least must never get into the power of the enemy. 
 
 408. Sec. 36-41. 
 
 "You ought not," said he, "to be discouraged, but you 
 ought to be making preparations to meet the enemy, so 
 that the soldiers may imitate you. And in the first place, 
 since nothing can be done without generals, let us appoint 
 generals and captains in place of those who have been lost. 
 Know well that we can not use our soldiers for any pur- 
 
 1 Compare the active and middle meaning of these verbs. 2 For my part : 
 these words merely emphasize the /. 8 Do you not, etc. : H. 1015 : G. 1603 : 
 B. 570-572: 60.488. 4 H. 724: G. 1069: B. 340: Go. 535. 6 both . . . 
 
 bored = had been bored in respect to both ears. 
 
ANABASIS BOOK III, CHAP. II 159 
 
 pose, 1 if they are dejected, and think only of what they 
 are to suffer." 2 
 
 409. Sec. 42-47. 
 
 Xenophon told the Greeks that he noticed that men who 
 strove to die nobly generally 3 passed their lives in happi- 
 ness. "Let us, therefore," said he, "since men are the 
 ones who win 4 victories, be brave men ourselves, and urge 
 the others on to bravery." Then Chirisophus praised the 
 words and deeds of Xenophon, 5 and urged them not to 
 delay, but to choose commanders at once. Xenophon 
 was elected in place of Proxenus. 
 
 BOOK III CHAPTER II 
 
 410. Sec. 1-6. 
 
 After the election 6 of the generals, Chirisophus ad- 
 dressed them as follows : " Although Ariaeus has betrayed 
 us, nevertheless we must not give in, but try not to get into 
 the power of the enemy alive." Cleanor then said, " Would 
 that the gods had punished 1 Tissaphernes before 8 he had 
 done harm to our generals. But since we understand his 
 faithlessness, let us never again be deceived by him." 
 
 411. Sec. 7-13. 
 
 Then Xenophon arose, splendidly equipped for war, and 
 said that now he hoped that they could punish 9 the 
 enemy. Just 10 then some one sneezed; and the soldiers 
 
 1 for any purpose : rl. 2 they . . . suffer : future tense. 8 o>s irl TO iro\v. 
 4 iroio>. 5 the words . . . Xenophon praised Xenophon for what he said and 
 did. 6 Do not use a noun. 7 Would . . .punished: what kind of a wish is 
 this? See 76. 8 See 128. 9 8io]v kir\.rLOr\^\,. 10 8^ : post-positive. 
 
160 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART III 
 
 vowed to offer sacrifices to Zeus, because they thought 
 this a good omen. After this incident, 1 Xenophon re* 
 minded them of the valor of their ancestors, and of how 
 many Persians they killed when Xerxes came against 
 Athens with his countless host 
 
 412. Sec. 14-19. 
 
 If you formerly dared to go against the Persians for 2 
 Cyrus, now, surely, you will be more courageous for 2 
 your own safety. Do not think 3 that you are worse off 
 because you see that Ariaeus and his men are in the 
 ranks of the enemy. Furthermore, 4 you should not be 
 discouraged because you have no cavalry, for when you 
 are on the ground you can hit much better whomever you 
 wish. 
 
 413. Sec. 20-25. 
 
 Xenophon told the Greeks that it was far better to take 
 men and compel them to lead than to use Tissaphernes as 
 a guide, and that all rivers were passable at their sources. 
 "I say," said he, "that the king would give you many 
 guides, if he saw that you were making preparations to 
 settle hereabouts. But if you remain, do not live 6 in 
 abundance or forget the way 6 home." 
 
 414. Sec. 26-32.. 
 
 " I think it best/' said Xenophon, "to burn up the super- 
 fluous baggage and try to conquer the enemy, so that they 
 may be our baggage-carriers. The most important point, 7 
 
 1 Omit. 2 irepC with the Genitive. 8 Do not think : see 62. 4 irpds 8' 
 ?TI. 5 do not live : see 62. 6 H. 742: G. 1102: B. 356: Go. 511. 7 The 
 . . .point: TO |iyurTOV. 
 
ANABASIS BOOK III, CHAP. Ill l6l 
 
 however, is for us to be more orderly and obedient than 
 formerly, and to help the commander punish the disobe- 
 dient. In this way the king will be disappointed, if we 
 allow 1 no one to be a coward." 
 
 415. Sec. 33-39. 
 
 After all had voted to do what Xenophon had proposed, 
 Xenophon again spoke : " It is plain that the enemy will 
 follow us like cowardly dogs; therefore, let us form the 
 hoplites in a hollow square 2 and appoint commanders for 
 the van, 3 flanks, and rear, so that we should not have to 4 
 arrange the men in case the enemy should attack us." 
 They decided that Xenophon should guard the rear, for 
 the present. 
 
 REVIEW OF CHAPTERS I AND II 
 
 416. Follow the directions given in 281-283. 
 The sight work should be connected prose. 
 
 BOOK III CHAPTER III 
 
 417. Sec. i-io. 
 
 Before the Greeks burned up the superfluous baggage, 
 they shared with one another what they needed. Then 
 Mithridates came up in the guise of 5 a friend and tried to 
 bribe some of the captains. The result was that 6 the 
 Greeks decided that the war should henceforth be without 
 heralds. As they went along, the Greeks could do no 
 harm to the Persians, because they did not shoot far 
 
 1 7riTpire0. 2 form . . . square = make a hollow square of the hoplites. 
 3 for the van : do not use the Dative. 4 have to : use 8&o. 6 in . . . of: 
 o>S. 6 The result was that : OXTTC. 
 
 GK. PROSE COMP. II 
 
l62 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART III 
 
 enough to reach them. 1 Moreover, whenever the Greeks 
 tried to pursue, the Persians shot backwards as they rode. 
 
 418. Sec. 11-20. 
 
 When the Greeks saw that they could not reach the 
 enemy with their missiles or overtake the-m in pursuit, 
 they thanked 2 the gods, because the Persians had shown 
 them what they needed. It happened that there were 
 some Rhodians in the army who knew how to use the 
 sling and who could shoot twice as far as the Persians. 
 These, therefore, by the use of money, 3 they formed into 
 a company of two hundred slingers. They provided them- 
 selves with cavalry also. 
 
 BOOK III CHAPTER IV 
 
 419. Sec. 1-9. 
 
 On the next day, the Greeks saw Mithridates coming 
 with a large force. As was the case 4 in the former attack, 
 he expected to do 5 much damage to the Greeks 6 ; but they 
 were more courageous now, because they had both cavalry 
 and slingers. Accordingly, they were victorious, and cap- 
 tured many of the Persians alive. There was in this place 
 a city named Larissa, which was captured in ancient times 
 by the Persians. 
 
 420. Sec. 10-18; 
 
 The city of Mespila 7 also was once besieged by the Per- 
 sian king, but he could not capture it by either siege or 
 
 1 shoot . . . them : cf. the text at the end of sec. 7. 2 x-P lv X W anc ^ 
 
 Dative. 8 by . . . money = by giving money. 4 was the case : omit these 
 
 three words. 5 expected to do = thought that he would do. 6 H. 725, a : G. 
 1073 : B. 340 : Go. 534, a. 7 Do not use the Genitive. 
 
ANABASIS BOOK III, CHAP. IV 163 
 
 assault. As the Greeks went on their journey, 1 Tissa- 
 phernes came in sight with a large force, but he retreated 
 very quickly, because the Rhodians shot a very long dis- 
 tance and did not miss 2 their man. While the Greeks 
 and Persians were skirmishing, the Greeks captured many 
 bows, which proved useful to the archers. 
 
 421. Sec. 19-24. 
 
 After these skirmishes, it became evident that the hollow 
 square threw the Greeks into confusion, for, whenever the 
 road was too 3 narrow, or they had to cross a bridge, the 
 hoplites were crowded out {oi their places^ Therefore 
 they formed six companies to help the phalanx whenever 
 the wings were drawn together or separated. 
 
 422. Sec. 25-34. 
 
 While the Greeks were marching through some 5 hills, 
 the Persian slingers and archers wounded many of them 
 by shooting down from the heights. But after the Greeks 
 got above them, they feared that they would be surrounded, 
 and fled. After this, the Greeks decided not to proceed 
 and fight at the same time, 6 because 7 there were many 
 wounded. 
 
 423. Sec. 35-41. 
 
 The Greeks decided to break camp and march as far as 
 possible during the night, for the Persians never encamped 
 near the Greeks on account of fear 8 of an attack. On the 
 
 1 went . . .journey : use one word. 2 H. 748 : G. 1099 : B. 356 : Go. 510. 
 3 Comparative. 4 of their places : omit. 5 Omit. 6 not . . . time = not to 
 proceed still fighting. 7 H. 971, a: G. 1568. 8 Do not use the noun. 
 
1 64 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART III 
 
 fourth day, however, the barbarians seized in advance 1 
 the spur of a mountain at the base of which they must 
 pass. Xenophon thought that, if he could get possession 
 of the summit of the mountain, the Persians would not be 
 able to remain. 
 
 424. Sec. 42-49. 
 
 "Well, I will give you your choice/' said Chirisophus, 
 " either to go to the summit or to remain with the army." 
 Xenophon chose to go, and took men from the van, and 
 started immediately. When the enemy saw that he had 
 set out, they too began to race to the summit. Xenophon 
 said to his men, " Have courage, 2 for after a little toil we 
 shall reach home safely." The Greeks reached the height 
 before the enemy. 3 
 
 BOOK III CHAPTER V 
 
 425. Sec. 1-9. 
 
 The Persians then turned and fled. But the Greeks 
 were discouraged when they saw that they had no place 
 from which to take provisions, for the barbarians suddenly 
 began to burn the villages. " I, at least," said Chiriso- 
 phus, " think we had better burn them also, so that they 
 may stop all 4 the more quickly." While the Greeks were 
 in perplexity because of the depth of the river, a Rhodian 
 came up and said that he would transport them across the 
 river, if they would give him what he needed. 5 
 
 1 in advance: irp6 in composition with the verb. 2 Have courage : 6ap- 
 p&o. 3 reached . . . enemy : see 169. * Omit. 6 he . . . needed: what kind 
 of a condition was used in the direct discourse? 
 
ANABASIS BOOK IV, CHAP. I 165 
 
 426. Sec. 10-18. 
 
 The Rhodian said that he would build a bridge by using 
 two thousand skins, each one of which would keep two 
 men from sinking. 1 This device, however, seemed im- 
 practicable to the generals. Then the Greeks went back 
 toward Babylon, so that the enemy might not know what 
 they intended 2 to do. After questioning the captives, the 
 Greeks decided to cross the Carduchian mountains. 
 
 REVIEW OF CHAPTERS III, IV, AND V 
 
 427. Follow the directions given in 295-297. 
 The sight work should be connected prose. 
 
 BOOK IV CHAPTER I 
 
 428. Sec. 1-14. 
 
 The Greeks entered the country 3 of the Carduchi as 
 secretly as they could, for they feared that an attack 
 would be made. At first, the Carduchi fled from the vil- 
 lages, but later, a few of them suddenly assembled on the 
 heights and fell upon the Greeks. If, however, at that 
 time there had been more, I think that the majority of the 
 Greeks would have been in danger of being destroyed. 
 
 429. Sec. 15-28. 
 
 Whenever the enemy attacked the rear guard as they 
 were passing along, Xenophon sent along word to the van 
 to wait ; but on one occasion 4 the van did not halt. Xeno- 
 
 1 from sinking : 11.748, 1029: G. 1117, 1615: B. 434: Go. 487. Also 
 see 161. ' 2 had in mind. 3 country of: omit. Use the Accusative with 
 els. 4 on one occasion : 
 
1 66 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART III 
 
 phon therefore went ahead to see what the trouble was, 
 and saw that Chirisophus was hurrying to seize 1 a certain 
 steep road. The enemy, however, captured the pass first. 
 Then a guide, on being questioned, told the Greeks that 
 there was 2 another road, and a height which they must 
 preoccupy. 
 
 BOOK IV CHAPTER II 
 
 430. Sec. 1-13. 
 
 Many, under the leadership of Callimachus, volunteered 
 to capture this height. Then Xenophon made an attack 
 on the enemy at the visible pass, so that the volunteers, 
 while the enemy were directing their attention to this 
 road, might go around without detection. 3 Afterwards, 
 Xenophon and the volunteers, by a simultaneous attack, 4 
 captured the pass. Then Xenophon, taking half of the rear 
 guard, followed the guide, and came upon two hills which 
 had been seized by the enemy, one of which he captured 
 by forming the companies in column. 
 
 431. Sec. 14-28. 
 
 The barbarians, however, abandoned the third hill for 
 fear that they would be surrounded. After the Greeks had 
 united, Xenophon told the enemy that he would not burn 
 their houses on condition that 6 they give up the dead. 
 Whenever the barbarians troubled the van or the rear, 
 Xenophon and Chirisophus helped each other. Some- 
 times 6 the Cretans, too, were very useful. 
 
 1 to seize : see 79. 2 Should the Imperfect be used? 8 withottt detection: 
 see 169. 4 by . . . attack = attacking at the same time. 6 on . . . that : 
 H. 999, a\ G. 1460: B. 596: Go. 567. 6 Cf. TJV & icai oirdrc. 
 
ANABASIS BOOK IV, CHAP. Ill l6/ 
 
 BOOK IV CHAPTER III 
 
 432. Sec. i-ii. 
 
 On reaching l the Centrites river, the Greeks encamped 
 very gladly, now that they had endured so many hardships 
 at the hands of the Carduchi. But the Greeks were greatly 
 discouraged, for their situation was as follows : in front 
 were horsemen who would keep them from crossing, 2 
 while in the rear the Carduchi were on the mountains 
 ready to attack them. At this juncture, 3 two young men 
 came running up and said that they had found a place 
 where they thought it was safe to cross. 
 
 433. Sec. 12-23. 
 
 The young men said that they could cross at this point 
 without wetting their waists. The Greeks, therefore, de- 
 cided to try this ford. Xenophon then hit upon a plan 4 ; 
 by running back along the river and by pretending to 
 cross there, he frightened the enemy so much that 6 they 
 did not prevent Chirisophus with the van from crossing. 
 When they were on the other side, Chirisophus shouted 
 to his soldiers not to pursue. 
 
 434. Sec. 24-34. 
 
 While the camp followers and the baggage train were 
 in the act of 6 crossing, the Carduchi were evidently com- 
 ing down from the mountains. Xenophon then faced 
 about and charged the Carduchi; but, as soon as they 
 
 1 On reaching: should the Present Participle be used? 2 from crossing: 
 H. 963 : G. 1549 : B. 643 : Go. 572, 573. 3 Kcupds. 4 hit . . . plan = devised 
 something. Use jx-qxavdofxai. 6 so much that: see 157. 6 in . . of: 
 
1 68 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART III 
 
 turned in flight, he wheeled to the right and crossed with 
 his men as quickly as he could. In this way the Greeks 
 all crossed this river safely, with the exception of a few 
 who were wounded. 1 
 
 REVIEW OF CHAPTERS I, II, AND III 
 
 435. Follow the directions given in 309-311. 
 The sight work should be connected prose. 
 
 BOOK IV CHAPTER IV 
 
 436. Sec. 1-13. 
 
 When the Greeks were marching through western Arme- 
 nia, its vice-satrap, Tiribazus, came up and said that he 
 would make a treaty with them, if they would not burn 
 his houses. While they were encamping, so much snow 
 fell that it kept warm whomever 2 it fell upon. There 
 Xenophon, by his example, 3 made the soldiers get up 4 
 and split wood. 
 
 437. Sec. 14-22. 
 
 Democrates was a man who never reported as true 
 whatever was not true. The Greeks, therefore, gave him 
 men and sent him to find out what the fires were. On his 
 return, 5 he said he had not seen any fires, but that he had 
 learned that Tiribazus was preparing to attack them in 
 the defiles of the mountains. As they were passing over 
 
 1 with . . . wounded : Genitive absolute. 2 kept warm whomever = was a 
 warm thing to, etc. 8 What does example really mean? 4 make get up: 
 compare the transitive and intransitive .meanings of avtcrTTjfu. 5 On his 
 return = having proceeded. 
 
ANABASIS BOOK IV, CHAP. V 169 
 
 the heights, they espied the camp of Tiribazus, and with a 
 charge l they captured about twenty horses. 
 
 BOOK IV CHAPTER V 
 
 438. Sec. i-ii. 
 
 The strong north wind and the deep snow destroyed 
 many of the soldiers. There the soldiers did not act 
 friendly toward one another, for those who had a plenty 
 of wood said that they would not let the others come near 
 the fire unless they shared 2 with them their wheat. After 
 this, Chirisophus came upon some water carriers, who told 
 him that the satrap was about a parasang distant. 
 
 439. Sec. 12-22. 
 
 As many as did not wear something black before their 
 eyes, lost them on account of the snow, 3 and their shoes, 
 too, froze on, if they did not unfasten them at night. The 
 sick, however, were of some use, for they helped the rear 
 guard frighten 4 the enemy by shouting as loud as they 
 could. As Xenophon and his men went along, they found 
 that all those in front had halted right in the snow. He 
 tried to make them get up. 
 
 440. Sec. 23-36. 
 
 The underground houses of the Armenians seemed very 
 strange to the Greeks. All sorts of animals were raised 
 in them. Xenophon said to the ruler of the village, " Lead 
 us well until we leave your country, and I will not deprive 6 
 
 1 with a charge = having charged. 2 H. 737 : G. 1097, 2 : B. 356 : Go. 
 510. 3 As . . . snow : see 109. 4 Compare the active and middle meaning 
 of <(>op<). 6 H. 724, 748, a: G. 1069, 1118: B. 340: Go. 535. 
 
I/O GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART III 
 
 you of your children." The soldiers had a good time here, 
 eating and drinking. Because Armenia had a large num- 
 ber of very spirited horses, its tribute to the king consisted 
 of horses. 
 
 BOOK IV CHAPTER VI 
 
 441. Sec. 1-13. 
 
 Under the leadership of the mayor, they marched along 
 at the rate of six parasangs a day until they reached a pass 
 which was held by the enemy. Chirisophus thought it 
 best to charge the enemy immediately after breakfast. 1 
 Xenophon, however, wished to seize secretly 2 some part 
 of the mountain, for he thought it was easier to go up 
 a steep road at night than to fight on level ground in the 
 daytime. 
 
 442. Sec. 14-27. 
 
 Now the Spartans practice stealing from early bcyhood; 
 therefore Xenophon thought that Chirisophus would be 
 a man capable of 3 seizing the height by stealth. Chiriso- 
 phus, however, said: "We are not the only ones who 
 know how to steal, for you Athenians are clever thieves." 4 
 As they usually did, the Greeks called for volunteers and 
 sent them to capture the mountain. 
 
 REVIEW OF CHAPTERS IV, V, AND VI 
 
 443. Follow the directions given in 321-323. 
 The sight work should be connected prose. 
 
 1 immediately after breakfast as soon as they had eaten breakfast. 2 seize 
 secretly: K\irTo>. 3 capable of: IKO.VOS and Infinitive. 4 clever thieves 
 clever to steal. 
 
1 
 
 ANABASIS BOOK IV, CHAP. VIII 171 
 
 I 
 BOOK IV CHAPTER VII 
 
 444. Sec. 1-14. 
 
 When the Greeks arrived among the Taochi, they came 
 upon a stronghold, which they had to take to get provi- 
 sions. On account of an encircling 1 river, there was only 
 one road, which the enemy protected by rolling down 
 rocks. On consideration, Xenophon hit upon this device : 2 
 "Let us run forward," said he, "until they begin to roll 
 down stones, and then retreat quickly. In this way we 
 would compel them to use up their rocks, and then we 
 can capture the place." This they did. 
 
 445. Sec. 15-27. 
 
 On leaving Gymnias, the Greeks had a guide who 
 escorted them, not out of good will, but that he might 
 persuade the Greeks to lay waste the land of his enemies. 
 As Xenophon drew near 3 the mountain, he heard a loud 
 shouting, and noticed that the noise became louder and 
 louder as the army advanced. If he had ridden forward, 
 he would have found the van embracing one another, and 
 shouting, "The sea, the sea." 
 
 BOOK IV CHAPTER VIII 
 
 446. Sec. 1-13. 
 
 The Greeks, through a former Athenian slave, who 
 could talk with the Macronians, told them that they had 
 waged war with the king, and were on their way to 
 
 1 encircling = which ivas in a circle. 2 hit . . . device devising the fol- 
 lowing. 3 dre^v near : irXi(]<rida> (Dative). 
 
1/2 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION PART III 
 
 Greece. After this, the Macronians were very friendly. 
 In attacking a large mountain among the Colchians, the 
 Greeks did not employ the phalanx, but left a space 
 between the companies. The object was to 1 prevent 2 the 
 enemy from outflanking them. 
 
 447. Sec. 14-28. 
 
 Xenophon encouraged his soldiers as follows : " Men, 
 these are the only ones who prevent us from reaching 
 home. 3 Let us make short work of them." 4 The enemy 
 were defeated, and fled in different directions. After 
 this, the Greeks reached the sea without further hin- 
 drance. Here for many days they were busy performing 
 the vows which they had promised, and instituting athletic 
 contests. 
 
 REVIEW OF CHAPTERS VII AND VIII 
 
 448. Follow the instructions given in 330-332. 
 The sight work should be connected prose. 
 
 1 The . . . to = they -did this that. 2 See 162. 8 that . . . home : see text, 
 sec. 14. 4 make . . . them : do not translate this literally. What does this 
 expression really mean? 
 
ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY 
 
 The student should consult a Greek-English vocabulary for the forms 
 and fuller meanings of the Greek words here given. Figures in 
 parentheses refer to sections of the book. 
 
 a, an, generally omitted, sometimes 
 
 rts (4)- f 
 able, iKavds, Swards (160); be , 
 
 about, d/u,<t, Trept (67). 
 
 above, vrre'p. 
 
 accompany. ITTO/AOI, <rui/aKoAov- 
 
 accomplish, 
 
 accordingly, ow, 817 (a post-posi- 
 
 tive). 
 account, on of, 810, Ive/ca (after 
 
 its word). 
 
 admiral, orpaTT/yds. 
 admire, Oavp.a.^w. 
 advance, make an , 
 
 TTpdcm/u. 
 afraid, be , 
 after, //.era. 
 again, TroAiv, en. 
 against, Trpds, iir 
 aid, oj</>c 
 all, Trots. 
 alone, 
 along, Trapa. 
 also, Kftt, before the word it em- 
 
 phasizes. 
 
 always, dei'. 
 
 among, cv, aV 
 
 and, Kat, 8e (a post-positive). 
 
 angry, be , opyt^o/xat, ^aX 
 
 announce, dyycAAc 
 
 another, oAAos- 
 
 any, anybody, any one, rts 
 
 (34, 2). 
 
 appear, </MUVO/UU. 
 applaud, 7ratv(o. 
 approach, TrAT/crta^a) ; let , Trpo- 
 
 crtrjpj,. 
 Ariaeus, 'Apiaios- 
 
 arms, armor, 
 
 arm, to , oTrAiifo). 
 
 army, o-rparcv/Aa, o-Tpart(3i, o-rpards. 
 
 arrive, d^t/cveo/Aat, 7rapct/xt. 
 
 arrow. rdfcv/Aa. 
 
 Artaxerxes. ^ 
 
 as, o>s. 
 
 ashamed, feel , ato- 
 
 ask, (a question), cpa/raco; 
 
 assistance, give , 
 
 Aca). 
 
 at, cv, Trpds, 7rt. 
 attack, 7rtTt^c/Aat, 
 
 await, 
 
174 
 
 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION 
 
 B 
 
 back, 
 bad, 
 
 barbarian, /3ap/3apiKOs, /3d, 
 battle, ftax 7 ? ' >i v ? fJLaxofJLaL. 
 be, dpi ; present, Trapet/xt, ?rapa- 
 
 ytyvo/xat. 
 beautiful, KoAo?. 
 because, on, <os; of, 8td (67). 
 become, ytyvo/xat. 
 before, TrptV, irpovOfv, irpo. 
 begin, dj 
 behind, o 
 believe, 
 
 benefit, w^eAe'w, cv Trote'w. 
 beside, Trapd. 
 betray, TrpoStSco/xt. 
 blame, 
 boat, 
 
 bow, rdfov ; use the , Toevo>. 
 bowman, 
 boy, TTCUS. 
 brave, 
 bravely, 
 bravery, dpcriy. 
 breadth, 
 bridge, 
 brother, 
 burn, Kaw, up or down, 
 
 Kara/cao). 
 
 but, dAAd, 8e (a post-positive). 
 buy, dyopdo>. 
 by, VTTO with genitive of agent ; iiri 
 
 call, KoXco. 
 
 camp, KaTao-Krjvtw, orparoTrcSov. 
 captain, Xoxayos- 
 capture, aipco), ap7rafa>; be cap- 
 tured, aA.t<TKo/xat (89). 
 care, take , 
 
 carefully, . 
 
 catch, Aa/x/^avo) ; be caught, aAt 
 
 (7KO/xat (89). 
 
 cavalry, man, ITTTTCVS. 
 cease, Travo/xat. 
 certain, a , TIS (4). 
 chance, by , generally use rvy 
 
 X(iV(o (169). 
 chariot, ap/xa. 
 choose, atpeo/xat. 
 Cilicia, KtAtKtd. 
 citizen, TroAtriys. 
 city, TroAis. 
 Clear chus, KAeapxos. 
 collect, cruAAcya), aOpoiw. 
 come, Ipxo/xat, have , ^KO>. 
 command, KeAeixo, dpx<*>. 
 commander, apxwv, crrpaTr/yds. 
 congratulate, cv8ai/xovt'o>. 
 conquer, 
 consider, 
 contest, 
 country, 
 courage, dpcriy. 
 coward, /ca/cds. 
 cross, over, &a/?ai'va>. 
 Cyrus, Kvpos. 
 
 danger, 
 
 daric, 8dpet/cds. 
 
 daughter, Ovydrrjp. 
 
 day, 17/xepd. 
 
 deceive^ i 
 
 deep, jSa^vs. 
 
 defeat, viKao) ; be defeated, 
 
 o/xat. 
 
 delay, Starpt^o). 
 deliberate, /?ouAcvo/xat. * 
 die, a.7roOvrj(TK(t) 7 rcAcvraa). 
 discouraged, be , 
 
ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY 
 
 175 
 
 disobey, a7rtoTa>. 
 distant, be , 
 
 do, TTOteO), TTpdTTO). 
 
 door, Ovpd. 
 
 draw, up, Tarro). 
 
 dread, 6/cve'o>. 
 
 each, IKCCOTOS. 
 
 either. ... or, $ . . . $. 
 
 embark, e/A/2aivco. 
 
 enemy, TroAe/xtos ; the , ot TTO\- 
 utot. 
 
 entire, ?ras, aTrds. 
 
 envy, <0oi/a). 
 
 escape, d7ro<euyo>; notice of ? 
 \avOdvd> (169). 
 
 especially, /xciAtcrra. 
 
 even, KO.I (before the word it em- 
 phasizes) ; not , ov8c or 
 
 ever, Trore, TTWITOTC. 
 
 evident, 0^7X05 . 
 
 evil, 
 
 fall, yiyvofjuLL ; on, /x7ri7rr<D. 
 father, 7rarr;/3. 
 
 fear, <^>o^o/xat, 8e'8otKa; <o/3os. 
 fellow-soldiers, avSpc? o-Tpartco- 
 
 rat, with or without co. 
 fight, /xa^o/xat, fJia-X 1 !' [cr/ccTrro/Aat. 
 
 find, VpL(TK(D\ OUt, C7KO7T60), 
 
 first, Trpcoros ; 7rpom>i/. 
 flee, c^eirya). 
 
 f ollow, 7ro/xat, aKoXavOeo) ; as fol- 
 lows, proper case of oSc (33). 
 food, OTTOS. 
 foolish, ^At'&os. 
 foot, TTOI;?. 
 foot-soldier, Tre^os. 
 for, -yap (a post-positive). 
 
 fourth, TeVapros. 
 friend, c^Aos, f evos. 
 friendly, <i'Aios, <^>tXos. 
 frighten, ^o^Seto; fear, 
 from, c^, Trapo, a7ro. 
 furnish, 
 
 general, 
 
 get, ytyvo/xat (in the sense of 
 obtain), rvy^ai/a), possession, 
 
 give, 6Y8u)/u. 
 
 glad, be , ^S 
 
 gladly, T/Scws. 
 
 go, et/u, cp^o/xat ; be gone, ot^o/xat. 
 
 good, dya^os. 
 
 great, fteyas, -rroAvs. 
 
 Greek, "EAAryv ; ' 
 
 guard, 
 
 guide, 
 
 happen, rvy^avo) (169), ytyvo/xat. 
 happy, cv8at/xa>v ; deem , et>oat- 
 
 harm, do ,' Ka/ccos Troteco, /?Xa7TTa>. 
 have, xw, dative of possessor with 
 
 i/u (26). 
 hear, dfcovo). 
 
 heavy-armed man, oTrAtr^?. 
 height, vi/^os ; aKpov. 
 her, oblique cases of avrrj (51). 
 herald, iajpv. 
 here, IvravOa, avrov, Scvpo. 
 hereupon, c/c TOVTOV, cvravOa. 
 hesitate, o/cvcw. 
 him, oblique cases of avros (45) ; 
 
 if reflexive, ov (51). 
 himself, cavrov (51) ; avros (46). 
 hinder, K(oAi)a>. 
 
176 
 
 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION 
 
 his, when not emphatic, use the 
 article (3, i); otherwise avrov, 
 CKCtVov (51); own, cavTov 
 
 (sO- 
 
 hold, \(D. 
 
 honor, TI/AT; ; rt/xaa> ; in , TI/UUOS. 
 hope, cXTTts. 
 hoplite, o 
 horse, 
 horseman, ITTTTCVS. 
 house, otKtd. 
 
 how, Tra)?, OTTO)? (83) ; many, 
 TTOCTOI, OTTOCTOI; large, ocros, 
 
 07TOCTOS. 
 
 hundred, 
 
 I, eyco (44). 
 
 if, a, cdv, lyi/, av. 
 
 immediately, 
 
 in, eV, cis ; order that, fva, <os, 
 
 OTTCD? (80). 
 
 inasmuch, see since, 
 injure, /?Aa7rra>. 
 instead, of, dvrt. 
 into, cts. 
 
 journey, 68os, iropcta; to make 
 
 a , Tropevofjuai. 
 judge, /cptvo). 
 just, SiKato?. 
 justice, St/catocrwjy. 
 justly, SiKaaos* 
 
 kill, a7TOKTtV(o; be killed, cwro- 
 
 king, )8a(rtXev5, be ? /3affi\va). 
 know, otSa (153), yiyvaxj/ca) (89). 
 
 large, /xcyas, TTO\VS; how 
 
 OTTOO-OS. 
 
 laugh, at, KarayeXaw. 
 lead, ayw, ^yeo 
 leader, 
 learn, ir 
 
 least, at , ye (a post-positive), 
 leave, 
 
 leisure, be at , 
 lest, ^ (84) . 
 letter, 
 
 long, 
 
 long, as as, cws (129). 
 loose, Xv<o. 
 love, </H/\.eoL>. 
 
 M 
 
 make, TTOICQ). 
 
 man, av^pwTro? (homo), avyp (vir). 
 manifest, <avepos, 8^X 
 many, so , roaovros, 
 march, eXawco, Tropevo/Aai ; Tropet'a. 
 mercenary, feviKos. 
 messenger, ayyeXos. 
 middle, 
 miss, dfJ 
 more, /xaXXov. 
 mother, /xr/r^p. 
 much, TToXi/s ; TroXv. 
 must, Set, XP 7 ?' avayKr) corf, and 
 
 the verbal in reo? (74, 75). 
 my, c/xos, sometimes c/xov or /^ov ; 
 
 of mine, e/xo? (51). 
 myself, c/xavrov; when intensive, 
 
 avros (51). 
 
 N 
 
 near, Trapa ; TrXryo-tov, eyyv?. 
 necessary, it is , Sei (74) 
 
ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY 
 
 177 
 
 need, Seouat. 
 
 praise, 7rcuva>. 
 
 l/ / 
 
 never, OVTTOTC, tup-ore. 
 
 present, be , Trapeifu, ?rapayt- 
 
 night, i/vf . 
 
 yvo/Liat. 
 
 no, no one, nobody, ovoW?, toy- 
 
 prevent, KcoXvco. 
 
 Sets. 
 
 proceed, Tropevo/xat, efeAawo). 
 
 not, ov, /xiy; only . . . but 
 
 promise, or make a , vrrurxveV 
 
 also, KOL . . . KULL. 
 
 pot. 
 
 notice, escape of, XavOdva) 
 
 provisions, TO. CTrtTT/Seio. 
 
 (169). 
 
 pursue, 3taJKa). 
 
 now, vuv ; already, rj&rj. 
 
 R 
 
 
 
 read, dvaytyvciio'Ka) (89). 
 
 obey, TreiOofJM. 
 
 receive, Aau/^cu'ci), devoucu. 
 
 on, CTTI, ev ; account of, eve/ca, 
 
 remain, p,evo). 
 
 (after its word) Sid. 
 
 remind, utui///cr/<aj. 
 
 one, cts, TIS (34, 2) ; another, 
 
 reply, dTro/cptvo/xat. 
 
 dXXiyXwv. 
 
 report, aTrayyeAAa). 
 
 or,,?. 
 
 restrain, Kare^o). 
 
 order, KeXeuo) ; in that, Tvo, cos, 
 
 retaliate, dvrtTroico). 
 
 O7TO)S (80). 
 
 ride, IXawo). 
 
 other, dXXos. 
 
 rightly, 8i/cat'oj?, opOus. 
 
 ought, xpv, SeT (74). 
 
 river, Trora/xos. 
 
 our, when not emphatic, by the 
 
 ruler, dpx<>v. 
 
 article (3, i); sometimes by 
 
 run, Tp\<D, ^0). 
 
 ^/XO)V (5 1 )' 
 
 
 overcome, Kpareco. 
 
 S 
 
 
 sail, set , TrXco). 
 
 P 
 
 sailor, vai;r>79. 
 
 palace, /fo<rtAeia. 
 
 same, 6 avros (46). 
 
 parasang, Trapacrdyyr^. 
 
 save, oxt)a). 
 
 pay, p.i.o-06^. 
 
 say, Xeya>, ^ry/xt ; said, CITTOV (139)- 
 
 paymaster, /ucr^oSoTiys. 
 
 sea, ^aXarra. 
 
 perceive, atcrvavo/xai. 
 
 see, opda) ; to, O-KOTT^O) ; be seen, 
 
 permit, eaco. 
 
 <^atvo/xai. 
 
 Persian, IIcpcrT;? ; HcpcrtKOs. 
 
 seem, or best, SOKC'GJ and da- 
 
 persuade, TreiOa). 
 
 tive. 
 
 pity, oiKTCtpo). 
 
 self, avros (46). 
 
 place, \wpiov ; take , ytyvo/xai. 
 
 send, Tre/xTTa) ; for, tieTcwreiiTro- 
 
 plain, TreStbv, 8^X09. 
 
 /xat. 
 
 plan, flovXtvu) ; /3ov\rj. 
 
 senseless, d<^po)v. 
 
 power, in the of. kiri. 
 
 set, out or forth, opadouat. 
 
 GK. PROSE COMP. 12 
 
GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION 
 
 seven, CTTTGI. 
 
 shut, up, Kara/cAetco ; off, 
 
 since, CTrci, CTreiS?/, oTroYe (64). 
 
 six, If. 
 
 skillful, Seiko's. 
 
 so, OVTCOS ; as to, that, 
 
 COOTC (158). 
 soldier, or/ocmtoTrys ; light-armed 
 
 some, somebody, TIS (34). 
 
 sort, what , TTOIOS, otos. 
 
 speak, A.yo>. 
 
 speech, Aoyos. 
 
 stadium or stade, ora&ov. 
 
 stay, /xeVco. 
 
 still, Irt. 
 
 stop, Trauco, dvaTravo/xat. 
 
 straightway, evtfus- 
 
 successfully, KaAxos. 
 
 such, of a kind, TOIOVTOS (of 
 
 what precedes), ToidcrSe (of what 
 
 follows) . 
 suffer, Tracr^w ; harm, 
 
 swear, cyxrutu. 
 
 take, Xa.jjL/3dv<j) ; place, ytyvo- 
 /xat; be taken, aXtorKo/xat (89). 
 
 talent, 
 
 taste, 
 
 tell, Xe'yo). 
 
 ten, SeKa. 
 
 than, iy. 
 
 that, on, /x>; (84); in order , 
 tra, cos, OTTCOS (80) ; so , OHTTC 
 (158) ; Ktvo9 (33) (the demon- 
 strative pronoun). 
 
 the, 6, 17, TO (i ; 3). 
 
 their, sometimes by the article 
 
 (3, i); also avTon/, e/ceiViov (51). 
 them, oblique cases of ai/ros in 
 
 plural (45). 
 themselves, reflexive, tavrwv (47); 
 
 intensive, avroi (46) ; sometimes 
 
 the middle voice. 
 thence, cvrevtfev. 
 there, cvTavOa, CKCI. 
 therefore, ow, Sta, TOVTO 
 thereupon, cVrar^a, cv^a. 
 they, generally omitted (42), some- 
 
 times, OVTOt, 6KCU/OI. 
 think, vofJLi^w, ot/xat, SOKCCO. 
 this, OVTOS, oSe (33). 
 thousand, ^tAtot. 
 Thracian, /oaf. 
 three, r/oets. 
 through, 8ta (67). 
 throTv, ptTTTto, at, /?oAAa>. 
 thus, ovrcos, <J8e. 
 Tissaphernes, Ttcro-a^epnys. 
 to, ets, Trpds, Trapa, CTrt, cos (with 
 
 persons). 
 
 treaty, make a , 
 truce, crTroi/Sat. 
 true, a\rjOrjs. 
 try, Tretpcto/xat. 
 twenty, ctKotri. 
 two, 8vo. 
 
 U 
 
 until, Icos, 
 
 (128). 
 
 urge 
 use, 
 
 valor, 
 
 van, o-To/xa ; those in the , ot 
 
ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY 
 
 179 
 
 vengeance, take on, 
 
 fUU. 
 
 very, 
 village, 
 virtue, dperr;. 
 
 W 
 
 wait, 7rpi/Ai/o>. 
 
 wall, rectos. 
 
 war, TToXe/xos ; carry on or make 
 
 well, ev. 
 
 what, rt's (34), os, OOTIS ; sort, 
 
 TTOtOS- 
 When, 7Tt, 7T10\7, OT. 
 
 whenever, CTrctSry, OTTOTC. 
 
 where, ov, v0a, oTny. 
 
 which, os. 
 
 who, rts (34)? os. 
 
 whole, oXos- 
 
 why, rt. 
 
 width, evpos- 
 
 wife, yvvrj. 
 
 willing, be , /2ovA.o/>uu, 
 
 wish, j8ovXo/xat, c^e 
 
 with, ow, yxra, l 
 
 within, Iv 
 
 wonder, 
 
 word, Xoyos. 
 
 worthy, aftos- 
 
 woman, yuvr/. 
 
 wrong, or be in the , doWo>. 
 
 Xenophon, Eevo<(ov. 
 
 Y 
 
 year, ITOS- 
 
 you, o-v (44). 
 
 your, often by the article (3, i), 
 
 v/xTpos, <rov (51). 
 yourself, reflexive, o-cavrov (51), 
 
 intensive, avros (46) 
 
 Zeus, Zcvs, G. Aio's, D. Aa, A. Awt, 
 V. Zev. 
 
SPECIMEN COLLEGE ENTRANCE EXAMINATIONS 
 IN GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION 
 
 AMHERST COLLEGE, 1897 
 
 i. Then he put Megaphernes to death, because he was 
 plotting against him. 2. The king, hearing from Tissa- 
 phernes of the preparations against him, was very angry. 
 3. These Ionian cities, which originally belonged to Tissa- 
 phernes, having been given him by the king, now belong 
 to Cyrus. 4. Syennesis, the king of Cilicia, wishing to 
 prevent Cyrus from entering his country, seized the pass 
 over the mountains. 5. But a messenger came and told 
 him that Menori had already led his army through the 
 pass, and was marching on through the plain towards 
 Tarsus. 
 
 BRYN MAWR COLLEGE, 1897 
 
 When the Turks. (Tovp/coi) attacked the Greeks in the 
 last war, the latter were once encamped in a small village 
 near the Peneios River. Fearing lest they should be 
 encircled on both sides, the commander-in-chief of the 
 Greek forces ordered the captains to summon their sol- 
 diers, in order that he might address them. " Greeks/' 
 he said, "let us rather die than be conquered." 
 
 180 
 
COLLEGE ENTRANCE EXAMINATIONS l8l 
 
 COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY, 1897 
 A 
 
 When after five days Chirisophus, who had been sent 
 to Athens that he might bring thence provisions for the 
 army, had not yet appeared, the generals would have 
 marched down into the plain, had they not seen the 
 enemy already there in large numbers. They decided 
 therefore to remain upon the heights. 
 
 B 
 
 Let us command the soldiers to cross the river, that we 
 may not appear more cowardly than the barbarians. 
 
 CORNELL UNIVERSITY, 1896 
 
 Here the Greeks were discouraged. For they saw that 
 there were large rivers which they must pass, and they 
 feared that the king would give them no leaders. But 
 Xenophon said, "the king would gladly send us away, if 
 he should see that we are not wishing to go. We must 
 therefore make preparations to remain here." By such 
 words Xenophon made his soldiers much braver. 
 
 Scholarship Examination 
 
 The Thebans, as it seems, wished to obtain the head- 
 ship of Greece, and therefore decided to send Pelopidas 
 as ambassador to the Persian king, to set forth the Advan- 
 tages both to him and to them 2 of his becoming their ally. 
 They thought that the fact of their Refusal to follow Agesi- 
 laus when he took up war against the king would 3 have 
 great weight with him. Besides that, they could claim to 
 
1 82 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION 
 
 be no longer inferior to the Lacedaemonians, having won 
 the victory at Leuctra. They imagined, therefore, that, 
 if the king should aid them by declaring the autonomy 
 of Messene" and thus 4 menacing their enemies, they could 
 obtain supremacy over all Greece. 
 
 1 Translate by a verb. 
 
 2 Translate by a conditional clause. 
 
 3 = greatly contribute toward persuading him. 
 
 DARTMOUTH COLLEGE, 1897 
 
 Presently they hear the soldiers ahead of them on the 
 heights shouting, "The sea! the sea!" and passing the 
 word along. Then they all broke into a run, even the rear 
 guard. And as soon as they reached the summit they fell 
 into one another's arms, weeping for joy. 
 
 Xenophon proceeds to tell how the Greeks gave their 
 guide many gifts before dismissing him. After he had 
 pointed out to them a village where they were to find 
 quarters, and the road leading to it, toward evening he 
 took his departure. A few days later they reached Tra- 
 pezus, where they offered the sacrifice which they had 
 vowed. 
 
 HARVARD COLLEGE, 1897 
 
 Once, when Xerxes was marching into Europe and the 
 Greeks saw * many grave 2 dangers before them, they sent 
 an embassy 3 to Crete and asked the Cretans 4 to help 
 them against the Great King. The Cretans immediately 
 dispatched messengers to Delphi to ask the god whether 5 
 they should gain any advantage if they went to the aid of 
 Greece. And Apollo answered, " You Cretans seem not 
 
COLLEGE ENTRANCE EXAMINATIONS 183 
 
 to remember that the Greeks have already received many 
 benefits at your hands, for which they feel no gratitude. 
 For your ancestors joined with them in their expedition 
 against Troy, when the wife of Menelaus was carried off 6 
 by a barbarian. Nevertheless, when your own King Minos 
 was murdered in Sicily, they refused to help you in pun- 
 ishing 7 his murderers. 8 " 
 
 When the Cretans heard that, they were so angry at the 
 Greeks that they refused to help them, and took 9 no part 
 in the war with 10 the Persians. Cf. HEROD. VII, 169. 
 
 1 saw before them : use irpo<|>a(vo|i<u. 6 dpiraa>. 
 
 2 great. 1 ri|j,<oplo|j,ai. 
 
 3 ambassadors. 8 4>ovevs- 
 
 4 Kpt]s. KpTjro's. 9 have part, |iT'x,a>. 
 6 if it would prove {become) better for them. 10 irpo's. 
 
 LELAND STANFORD JUNIOR UNIVERSITY, 1896 
 
 Translate into Greek : 
 
 When Cyrus marched against his brother, he took with 
 him ten thousand Greeks and many barbarians. The 
 Greeks conquered easily, but Ariaeus and the barbarians 
 fled. Cyrus himself was killed in the battle, and not long 
 afterwards most of the Greek generals were seized. They 
 were then without generals or guides and in the midst of 
 a hostile country ; but they showed themselves brave men 
 and conquered all their foes. 
 
 PRINCETON COLLEGE, 1897 
 
 Cyrus and his army remained twenty days in that 
 place. The soldiers were unwilling to proceed, because 
 
1 84 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION 
 
 they thought he was marching against the king. Clear- 
 chus tried to persuade them, telling them that Cyrus had 
 honored him and would honor them, if they would obey. 
 If you do not wish to go, I shall remain with you, that 
 you may know my good will (evvoia) towards you. Clear- 
 chus would not have been a brave man, if he had not 
 spoken to his soldiers. Let him be honored. 
 
 VASSAR COLLEGE, 1897 
 
 Let us try to return to Hellas as quickly as possible, 
 for I fear, if we remain in this country much longer, we 
 shall forget the way homeward. And it is not the part 
 of brave men to flee from danger, but to prefer to die 
 nobly rather than to live basely. 
 
 He said that they ought to burn up all their wagons, 
 if they intended to march quickly ; otherwise these would 
 be inconvenient to transport, while they would be in no 
 way helpful in battle. 
 
 WELLESLEY COLLEGE, 1897 
 
 And Cyrus called together his generals and said : 
 " Xenias and Pasion have left us ; but let them clearly 
 understand that they have neither run away, for I know 
 where they have gone ; nor have they escaped, for I have 
 triremes so as to take their boat. But I, for my part, will 
 not pursue them, nor shall any one say that I use a man 
 as long as he may be with me, but whenever he wishes to 
 go away I seize him and abuse him and take away his 
 money. But let them go knowing that they are more 
 disloyal toward us than we are toward them. And I have 
 their wives and children under guard (lit. being guarded) ; 
 
COLLEGE ENTRANCE EXAMINATIONS 185 
 
 but not even of these shall they be deprived, but they 
 shall receive them -back on account of their former loyalty 
 (aperrj) toward me." 
 
 WILLIAMS COLLEGE, 1897 
 
 Translate into Greek the following passage (which is 
 based upon the previous passage \_Anab. VII, vi, 1-6]): 
 
 Since Thibron was in need of generals and captains, 
 he offered to the former (rofc pev) four darics a month, 
 and to the latter (rofc Se), two, if they would take-the-field 
 against the army of Tissaphernes. When they learned 
 that Seuthes was not in need of them and would no longer 
 promise them wages, they said that they would gladly 
 withdraw from his country. And so early the next morn- 
 ing the soldiers were collected together at the call of 
 Xenophon (gen. absol.). And they also offered no oppo- 
 sition. And so the whole army of the Greeks hurried-off- 
 with (avvrpe^co) the messengers (ayyeXos) in order that 
 they might not be deprived (aTrocrre/oeft)) of wages. 
 
 YALE COLLEGE, 1897 
 Translate into Attic Greek : 
 
 In the battle the Persians killed Cyrus ; and the king, 
 therefore, thinking the victory his, sent heralds to the 
 Greeks to command them to surrender l their arms. But 
 the Greeks were indignant at this, 2 and said to the heralds : 
 "If the king thinks he is victorious, let him come and take 
 our arms. But if we should surrender them out of friend- 
 ship, what will he give us in return ? If Cyrus were living, 
 he would already be king in place of 3 his brother; for 
 
1 86 GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION 
 
 whoever defeats the enemy, as we have you, dictates the 
 terms 4 of peace." 
 
 Where does that young man live who stands by the 
 door ? 
 
 1 irapaSCScofu. 2 Literally, bore this heavily. 3 dvr. 
 4 Literally, tells on what (condition) there shall be peace. 
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO, 1897 
 Elementary Prose Composition 
 
 Translate into Greek : 
 
 (a) Go and ask Cyrus for a boat, that you may sail back. 
 (6) Since it is necessary for you to go with me, do not 
 
 abandon me. 
 
 ( c ) Let some one ask the general what he wants. 
 (X) The king thought that the enemy would fight on the 
 
 same day. 
 
 ( e ) He does not fear that he will not conquer his brother. 
 (f) Let the king come himself and take our arms, if he 
 
 wants them. 
 
 Advanced Prose Composition 
 Translate into Greek : 
 
 The messengers, when they had heard this, went away 
 and came back quickly; and by this it was evident that 
 the king was somewhere near, or some one else upon 
 whom it had been enjoined to do this ; and they said that 
 they seemed to the king to speak what was reasonable, 
 and had come with guides, who, if a truce should be made, 
 would lead them to a place from which they could get pro- 
 visions. 
 
COLLEGE ENTRANCE EXAMINATIONS 187 
 
 But he asked them whether there was a truce just for 
 the men who were coming and going, or whether there 
 would be a truce for the rest also. They replied : " For 
 all, until your message be reported to the king." 
 
 Now, when they said this, Clearchus sent for them and 
 deliberated ; and it seemed best to make the truce quickly, 
 and quietly to go to the provisions and take them. 
 
 UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA, 1897 
 
 Translate : When Cyrus determined to march against 
 his brother, he collected together as large an army as he 
 could and summoned several Greek generals to join him, 
 for he believed the Greeks to be far superior to the Per- 
 sians in war (TO, TroXefutcd). But he did not at first tell 
 them his purpose. So when the Greeks began-to-suspect 
 at length that they were marching against the king, they 
 refused to go further, and claimed they had not been hired 
 for this. Clearchus, one of the Greek generals, attempted 
 to compel his soldiers to march on; but they not only 
 refused to do so when ordered, but flung stones at him, 
 so that he barely escaped being killed. Later, he called 
 his soldiers to a meeting and, attempting to address them, 
 burst-into-tears, and could-not-speak (was silent) for a long 
 time, so that his men wondered (to see him). At length 
 he said : " Soldiers, Cyrus has been a good friend to me ; 
 he has honored me highly when I was an exile from my 
 native land, and I have promised to help him in return. 
 But without you (eprj^o^ and gen.) I can neither help a 
 friend nor punish an enemy." 
 
A Grammar of Attic and 
 Ionic Greek 
 
 By FRANK COLE BABBITT, Ph.D. (Harvard) 
 
 Professor of the Greek Language and Literature, Trinity College, Hartford ; 
 formerly Fellow of the American School of Classical Studies at Athens. 
 
 PRICE, $1.5O 
 
 THIS grammar states the essential facts and principles of the Greek 
 language in concise form, with only so much discussion as may 
 reasonably be demanded for a clear understanding of the subject. 
 It therefore meets the wants of secondary schools and at the same time 
 is sufficient for all ordinary demands of the college course. 
 
 A Modern Grammar. The book incorporates the results of 
 the more recent philological studies, and includes many departures 
 from conventional presentation. Due regard is paid to the fact that 
 analogy plays an important part in language, and that the context is 
 often more important than grammatical rules in determining the exact 
 significance of mode or tense. 
 
 Treatment of Cases. The treatment of cases is thoroughly log- 
 ical and clear. The true genitive and the ablative genitive are dis- 
 tinguished from each other and considered separately ; likewise the 
 true dative, the locative dative, and the instrumental dative. In this 
 way much confusion is avoided. 
 
 Rules of Agreement. The general rules of agreement are first 
 given in a preliminary paragraph and are then followed by a general 
 statement regarding attraction and construct ad sensum, and its appli- 
 cation to substantives, adjectives, verbs, etc. 
 
 Treatment of Modes. The general significance of each mode is 
 summarized briefly at the beginning, with its uses grouped and treated 
 under the head of statements, questions, wishes, commands, etc. The 
 various forms of statement are taken up and contrasted, thus allowing 
 the student to perceive at a glance their similarities and differences. 
 
 Classes of Verbs. While every portion ^of grammar has been 
 simplified as much as possible, the notice of teachers is directed 
 especially to the fact that the verbs have been reduced to five classes. 
 In spite of this, however, nothing has been sacrificed in the process. 
 
 Indirect Discourse. The subject of indirect discourse is put at 
 the end of syntax, and the principles have been fully stated in their 
 proper places. The general principles are clearly enunciated, followed 
 by the details with numerous examples. 
 
 Syntactical Usage. Tables of syntactical usage for reference are 
 included to make it possible for the pupil to perceive the normal 
 usage at a glance. 
 
 AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY, Publishers. 
 
Xenophon's Anabasis 
 
 SEVEN BOOKS 
 
 EDITED BY 
 
 WILLIAM R. HARPER, Ph D., D.D., LL.D. 
 
 President of the University of Chicago 
 
 AND 
 
 JAMES WALLACE, Ph.D. 
 President of Macalester College, St. Paul, Minn. 
 
 Cloth, 12mo, 575 pages, with Maps, Diagrams, etc. . Price, $1.50 
 
 This edition of the Anabasis embodies all those features 
 which have made Harper's Classical Series so popular and 
 successful, and in addition possesses many other points of 
 special value to students of Xenophon. Apart from the 
 text proper the book includes a Descriptive and Historical 
 Introduction on Persia and Greece ; a concise life of 
 Xenophon; Bibliography; Itinerary; Inductive Exercises 
 in Greek ; Themes for Investigation ; Lists of Words ; 
 Idioms ; Ready Reference Tables, giving inflections of 
 various parts of speech, including paradigms of Infinitives, 
 Participles, and Irregular Verbs ; and a Complete Vocab- 
 ulary of all the words used in the seven books. 
 
 Books I-IV are edited with full Grammatical Refer- 
 ences, Topics for Study, and Critical Notes. 
 
 Books V-VII are edited for Sight Reading, with sug- 
 gestions and foot-notes. 
 
 Copies sent, prepaid, to any address on receipt of the price. 
 
 American Book Company 
 
 New York * Cincinnati Chicago 
 
Greek Dictionaries 
 
 L1DDELL AND SCOTT'S GREEK-ENGLISH LEXICON 
 
 Revised and Enlarged. Compiled by HENRY GEORGE LIDDELL 
 D.D., and ROBERT SCOTT, D.D., assisted by HENRY DRISLER, 
 LL.D. Large Quarto, 1794 pages. Sheep . . . $10.00 
 The present edition of this great work has been thoroughly revised, 
 
 and large additions made to it. The editors have been favored with the 
 
 co-operation of many scholars and several important articles have been 
 
 entirely rewritten. 
 
 LIDDELL AND SCOTT'S GREEK-ENGLISH LEXICON Intermediate 
 
 Revised Edition. Large Octavo, 910 pages. 
 
 Cloth, $3.50; Half Leather, $4.00 
 
 This Abridgment is an entirely new work, designed to meet the 
 ordinary requirements of instructors. It differs from the smaller 
 abridged edition in that it is made from the last edition of the large 
 Lexicon, and contains a large amount of new matter. 
 
 LIDDELL AND SCOTT'S GREEK-ENGLISH LEXICON Abridged 
 
 Revised Edition. Crown Octavo, 832 pages. Half Leather $1.25 
 This Abridgment is intended chiefly for use by students in Secondary 
 
 and College Preparatory Schools. 
 
 THAYER'S GREEK-ENGLISH LEXICON OF THE NEW TESTAMENT 
 Being Grimm's Wilke's Clavis Novi Testamenti. Translated, 
 Revised, and Enlarged by JOSEPH HENRY THAYER, D.D., LL.D. 
 Royal Quarto, 727 pages . Cloth, $5.00 ; Half Leather, $6.50 
 This great work embodies and represents the results of the latest 
 researches in modern philology and biblical exegesis. It traces histori- 
 cally the signification and use of all words used in the New Testament, 
 and carefully explains the difference between classical and sacred usage. 
 
 YONGE'S ENGLISH-GREEK LEXICON 
 
 By C. D. YONGE. Edited by HENRY DRISLER, LL.D. 
 
 Royal Octavo, 903 pages. Sheep $4.50 
 
 AUTENRIETH'S HOMERIC DICTIONARY 
 
 Translated and Edited by ROBERT P. KEEP, Ph.D. New Edition. 
 
 Revised by ISAAC FLAGG, Ph.D. 
 
 I2mo, 312 pages. Illustrated. Cloth . . . $1.10 
 
 Copies sent, prepaid, to any address on receipt of the price 
 
 American Book Company 
 
 New York Cincinnati Chicago 
 
A GREEK PRIMER 
 
 By CLARENCE W. GLEASON, A.M. (Harvard) 
 of the Roxbury Latin School 
 
 Price, $1.00 
 
 \A7ITH many modifications suggested by class-room ex- 
 perience, this book continues the general plan of Gleason 
 and Atherton's First Greek Book. 
 
 It develops the verb somewhat more slowly and naturally, 
 with the second aorist still farther to the fore. The number of 
 lessons has been increased, especially in order to give more 
 practice on verb forms. The infinitive and participle and 
 indirect discourse are treated at greater length. Three lessons 
 are devoted entirely to Greek equivalents of common Latin 
 constructions. 
 
 Although the book is intended as an introduction to the 
 study of Greek, rather than as a short cut to the Anabasis of 
 Xenophon, the latter work has been drawn on freely for reading 
 matter. 
 
 The reading selections in and following the lessons are 
 intended to arouse the beginner's interest in Greek literature, 
 and for that end are taken from as varied sources as possible. 
 To facilitate the acquisition of a permanent vocabulary, both 
 Greek and English vocabularies contain references to the lesson 
 vocabulary where the words first occur. 
 
 BOOKS BY C. W. GLEASON 
 
 A Greek Primer . . . $1.00 
 
 The Story of Cyrus . . * . .75 
 
 Xenophon's Cyropaedia . ; . 1.25 
 
 A Term of Ovid . , . . .75 
 
 AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY 
 
 NEW YORK CINCINNATI CHICAGO 
 
 BOSTON ATLANTA DALLAS SAN FRANCISCO 
 
 (281) 
 
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY 
 BERKELEY 
 
 Return to desk from which borrowed. 
 This book is DUE on the last date stamped below. 
 
 JAN 2 5 1954 LU 
 
 LD 21-100m-7,'52(A2528sl6)476 
 
00281 
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY